JP6048987B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  As a recent pachinko game machine, a big hit lottery with a predetermined probability is made when a game ball enters the starting port on the game board surface (game area), and if the big hit lottery is won, The mainstream is pachinko gaming machines that transition to the state and can open a large winning opening provided on the game board surface to obtain a large number of prize balls. Among the pachinko gaming machines configured in this manner, there is a probability-changing gaming state that increases the winning probability in the jackpot lottery and a time-reducing gaming state that increases the efficiency of symbol variation for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery There is also a gaming machine that enhances the interest of the game by creating a game progress state that is advantageous to the player by these game states.

Japanese Patent No. 5202970 Japanese Patent No. 5185915 Japanese Patent No. 469975 JP 2012-24501 A

  However, since there are many such gaming machines, there is a problem that it is desired to develop a model that can realize further innovative gaming properties.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied;
If satisfied the propriety determination permission condition, and spruce judging means for performing those determination based on the random number,
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
If the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, the variable winning opening is advantageous for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be set to a state,
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game;
As a table to be referenced when determining the variation display time of the identification information, there is at least a first variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table has at least a second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information. and, after the completion of the execution of the special game, the first shift-shaped on purpose second variation shaped on purpose varies state control that may be controlled to be either a reference to a second variation pattern table refers to the first shift pattern table Means and
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed In, it is configured so that the execution contents of the special game are different from each other,
When a special game is executed when a certain type of specific stop identification information of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and there is a ball entering a specific area while a specific game state to and first shift state after completion of execution of the special game,
If there is no entry into the specific area when the special game is executed when the certain type of specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second game is completed. It is configured to change state,
When a specific game state is entered after the execution of a special game, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display,
As a table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table further include a third variation pattern table in which the selection trend of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of a special game when the certain type of specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the one unit is counted from the end of execution of the special game. After being performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be in the third variation state with reference to the third variation pattern table,
In the case where the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second number of holds greater than the first number of holds, the result is a first variation state and the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is non-winning The variation display time of the identification information that is most likely to be taken in the case of the third variation state and the result of the determination of success / failure by the success / failure determination means is less than the variation display time of the identification information that is most likely to be acquired. Is configured for a long time,
More than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the result of the determination of success / failure by the determination unit is non-winning, and is in the third variation state and by the determination unit The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the number of candidates related to the variable display time of identification information that can be selected in the case where the result of the determination is non-winning is reduced. .
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this different aspect is
A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
Based on the random number obtained by the random number obtaining means, the validity determination means for performing the validity determination;
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
When the determination result of the determination by the determination unit is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit is the specific stop identification information, the variable winning opening can be made advantageous for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game;
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game;
As a table to be referenced when determining the variation display time of the identification information, there is at least a first variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table has at least a second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information. Then, after the execution of the special game, the variable period state control that can be controlled to be either the first variable period state referring to the first variable pattern table or the second variable period state referring to the second variable pattern table Means and
Depending on the type of specific stop identification information, the execution content of the special game may differ, while the execution content of the special game has a plurality of types of specific stop identification information that is the same as each other,
When a special game is executed when a certain type of specific stop identification information among the plurality of types of specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, execution of the special game is performed when a specific area is entered. While in the specific gaming state and the first variable period state after the end,
If there is no entry into the specific area when the special game is executed when the certain type of specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second game is completed. A pachinko gaming machine configured to be in a variable period state.
<Appendix>
In addition, although the different aspect different from this aspect is listed below, it can implement without being limited to these at all.
The pachinko gaming machine according to this different aspect is
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inability to enter or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. If there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation period state is not set.
According to the presence / absence of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, the high-frequency release state in which the specified number of times is different after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, it is possible to realize further novel gaming characteristics in the gaming machine adopting the concept of creating a game progress state advantageous to the player.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect execution determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is an effect content determination table configuration diagram on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the pre-reading effect execution determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 of the present embodiment. FIG. 34 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 35 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 36 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third modification of the present embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 39 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 42 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 shows special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 of the present embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 46 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 47 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 5 of the present embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 6 of the present embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the end demonstration time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the end demonstration extension effect execution process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the special game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 59 is an effect content determination table on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. The “identification information” may be in any form as long as the type of information can be identified through the five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, etc.), but is preferably visual, for example, numbers, letters, designs. The thing with the shape of etc. can be mentioned. In this specification, “identification information” may be called a main game symbol / special symbol (special symbol) or a decorative symbol (design), but the “special symbol (special symbol)” is the main control board. The “decoration pattern (design)” is identification information as an effect displayed on the sub-control board side. “Displaying identification information” is not limited to a display method. For example, light emission of a light emitting means (for example, liquid crystal, LED, 7-segment) (including not only whether light is emitted but also a color difference), physical Display (for example, a symbol drawn on a reel band is stopped and displayed at a predetermined position). “Direction” refers to display content that enhances the fun of the game. For example, identification information fluctuates / stops, notices, etc., moving images such as animation and live action, still images such as pictures, photos, characters, etc. Combinations can be mentioned. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following conditions, the advance state is an easy-to-win state and the evacuation state is an uneasy state of winning. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “Estimated average execution time of easy-to-play games per unit time” is assumed to be a situation in which there is a constant change in the auxiliary game symbol (for example, there is always a hold related to the auxiliary game symbol). In this case, it means the ratio of the open period per unit time (for example, 5 minutes) of the variable member attached to the start port. In terms of internal processing, in other words, for example, When a variable member is attached to the start port, the length of the variable member opening period (so-called open extension function activated / non-actuated state), the normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol) that triggers the opening of the variable member is won Probability level (so-called ordinary figure high probability state / low probability state), normal symbol (auxiliary game symbol), which is the trigger for opening the variable member, the length of change time (so-called usual figure fluctuation reduction function) Operating condition-actuated state), is realized by any one or more combinations of the like. The “average value of the variation display period of identification information” is not limited to the meaning of measuring the variation display period for each variation display of identification information and taking the average value based on the actual measurement value. More specifically, when the variable display period is determined for each variable display of the identification information, and there are multiple types of variable display periods to be determined (selected), , The expected value based on the plurality of types of variable display periods (the sum of “selection probability × variable display period”). If there is one type of variable display period to be selected, one type The variable display period itself is (that is, includes both concepts). Furthermore, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of loss, the concept limited to only the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information at the time of hit, or only the variable display period with the highest selection probability In other words, it is possible to supplement the fact that the meaning of this wording is to be used as an index indicating the progress speed of the game that can be experienced by the player. As a method of realizing different "average values", the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are changed, or even if the variable display period candidates and / or selection probabilities are the same, a further variable display period is added. There are various methods such as changing the period value when doing this, but it is not limited to any method). “The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second period in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is different from the first period. "At least having a variable period state" means not only the two states but also three or more states (or any two states in the case of having three or more states) For example, the state transition of “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” is made according to the number of times of display of the identification information. Including those that can be taken. In this case, when the average value of the variation display period of the identification information in each state is configured as “first variation period state” <“second variation period state” <“third variation period state”, It is possible to construct a state transition of high-speed game progress state → medium-speed game progress state → low-speed game progress state {Of course, the reverse state transition (game progress state) may be constructed, In that case, it becomes suitable when used in combination with the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next jackpot + the easy-to-open-chuo state (the next jackpot is not obtained despite the situation where the next jackpot occurrence is definite) As the situation continues, the speed of progress of the game increases, so there is a case where it is possible to dispel the feeling of fatigue during so-called humming. Further, as a feature of each state, in the “first variation period state”, the difference between the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of loss and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is “ In the “third variation period state”, which is smaller than the difference in the “second variation period state”, the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of losing and the average value of the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hitting In addition to the difference being smaller than that in the “second variation period state”, the identification information variation display period is likely to be relatively long compared to the “first variation period state” (particularly in the event of a loss) In other words, in the “second variation period state”, the variation display period of the identification information at the time of hit is relatively long compared to other states. (I.e., the fluctuation display period for short fluctuations where the loss is definitive and the fluctuation display period for medium fluctuations suggesting a hit are not selected (or difficult to select), but the fluctuations in reach fluctuations (per long fluctuation) It can be exemplified that it has a feature that only the display period is selected (or is easily selected)}. The “specific period in the high-probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game” may be a period from immediately after the end of the execution of the special game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made. It may be a period from the time when one or more symbol changes are made after the execution of the game until a predetermined number of symbol changes are made (that is, the high probability lottery state is maintained after the execution of the special game is completed) If it is within the range, it means that it is an arbitrary period within the range, so the aforementioned “first variation period state” → “second variation period state” → “third variation period state” The specific period may mean the stay period of the “first variation period state” and / or the “second variation period state”. “When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the information regarding the hold” means, for example, that there is a high possibility that a special game (so-called big hit game) will occur at the time of the hold-up, but there is a possibility that a special game will occur There are no particular limitations on the criteria. More specifically, “winning random number (random number for success / failure lottery)”, “variation mode determination random number” for determining the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol, “symbol determination random number” for determining the stop symbol, Random values such as “hit symbol determination random numbers” that determine whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game may be used as a criterion for judgment, and event contents derived from these random values (results of success / failure determination) The length of the variation time, the type of stop symbol, whether or not to shift to a specific game, etc.) may be used as the judgment criteria. “Suggesting or notifying the presence of a hold” means, for example, an effect at the time of the on-hold digestion until reaching the hold (a design variation mode of a decorative design, or in conjunction with it) In the case of notification, for example, a display mode of a holding indicator lamp (which may be an image on a liquid crystal display device) at the time of occurrence of the holding Is changed (in that case, the display color is changed, the display shape is changed, etc.), the sound such as the on-hold sound or BGM is changed at the time of the on-hold occurrence, and the effect lamp at the time of the on-hold occurrence Changing the lighting mode of the (frame lamp, etc.), or executing mode of other effects (decoration pattern of the decorative pattern, background effects, etc. performed in conjunction with it) executed at the time of the hold occurrence The To reduction, and the like.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa. In addition, in this example, “table” is not limited to the format, and one or more selection candidates are selected from a plurality of selection candidates based on one or more information. It should be understood that this is an associated mode. Furthermore, numerical values (for example, winning probability at the time of lottery execution, maximum number of rounds at the time of special game, symbol variation time, number of continuations in each gaming state, etc.) as specific examples shown in the following embodiments and modifications are as follows: This is merely an example, and in particular, under different conditions (for example, according to the condition of the first main game side and the second main game side, by the condition of the probability variation game and the non-probability variation game, by the time shortening game and non- It is understood that the magnitude relations and combinations of the numerical values shown in the conditions for time-saving games, etc.) may be changed as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the following embodiments and modified examples. Should. For example, on the first main game side and the second main game side, the magnitude relationship between the winning probability at the time of the lottery execution and the expected value of the maximum number of rounds at the time of the special game is as follows: first main game side = second main game side Even if it is illustrated as such, the magnitude relationship may be changed as appropriate so that the first main game side <the second main game side, or the first main game side> the second main game side, etc. Good (same for other values and conditions). Also, for example, when configuring based on the intention that the probability variation gaming state will continue until the next jackpot occurs, whether to set “65535” as the number of continuations (configure to continue substantially), Or, even in the options of the realization method based on the same purpose, such as maintaining the probability variation game state until the next jackpot occurs without setting the number of continuations, as long as it does not greatly deviate from the purpose of the following embodiments and modification examples Should be understood as appropriate.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has mechanisms for storing game balls, sending out the game balls to the launching rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Further, a speaker D24 is provided between the upper ball tray D20 and the lower ball tray D22, and a sound effect corresponding to the gaming state or the like is output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are provided apart from each other, and flow down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area). The ball is configured to be easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but not easily guided to the second main game start port B10. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is not easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is easily guided to the second main game start port B10. . It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are spaced apart from each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port A10 and the first main game start port A10 The two main game start ports B10 may be arranged so as to overlap with each other. In that case, the upper portion of the second main game start port B10 is blocked by the presence of the first main game start port A10. May be.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the right side and the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) can be guided to the auxiliary game start port H10. {However, the present invention is not limited to this. A game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start port H10, while the left side of the game area D30 (the center of the game area is The game balls flowing down the reference) may be configured not to be guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10}.

  Next, a first grand prize winning port C10 and a second grand prize winning port C20 are provided above the out port D36, and a game ball flowing down the right side or the left side (based on the center of the game region) of the game region D30. Is configured so as to easily pass through the area where the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out mouth D36.

  Next, the first grand prize winning opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) is stopped by the big hit symbol, and is an out port. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above D36. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) As a mode (so-called slide type attacker) that can take a state where the opening on the passage where the game ball can roll is a big prize opening and the opening is closed or opened. Well, it is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the special winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located above the opening D36. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game balls that have entered the second grand prize opening C20 are configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker) or an opening on a passage where a game ball can roll is used as a big prize opening, and the opening can be closed or opened (so-called slide-type attacker). It is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big winning opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE provided with a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling the payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 A launching device D42 that launches each ball, a launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, a power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and a switch that turns on / off the pachinko gaming machine The power switch Ea and the like are provided on the back surface of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. }, A drive solenoid (not shown) (the above-mentioned first big prize opening electric combination solenoid C13, second big prize opening electric combination solenoid C23, etc.), information display LED (not shown), etc. It is electrically connected to an input / output device that is indispensable to control the progress of the game based on input signals from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, as described above, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown). ing. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub-main control part SM (sub-game control means SM), sub-sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. are data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. A game progress means MP for managing the game, a game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing information relating to the game state and the like, and various game information {eg, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {eg, , 16R jackpot, 8R jackpot, 4R jackpot, loss}, information relating to variation mode (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} (And a command transmission buffer MT10 for accumulating unsent commands) and the prize ball payout control board KH so as to pay out predetermined prize balls based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes. Has a prize balls paid out determination means MH, the.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result A random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, a hold control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each start port during the variable display as a hold ball within the upper limit number, and will be described later Based on the first main game side random number, the second main game side random number, and the auxiliary game side random number, a game content determination means MN for determining the content related to the game, and a display for performing control of displaying and changing and stopping each symbol Control means MP10 and second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20- for performing various processes directly related to opening / closing determination of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10 B and normal games A special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game advantageous to the player, and a determination as to which game state the current game state is to be transferred with respect to the first main game, the second main game and the auxiliary game; Specific game control means MP50 for performing the process of shifting the game state based on the determination, and the current and past game states [e.g., the state relating to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability variation game state, time reduction Gaming state), special gaming state}, state relating to auxiliary games (easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbol and variation mode information relating to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, special game Game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing the game state (for example, the number of rounds or winning number information)]. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a second main game start entrance. The second main game start opening entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and the auxiliary game entrance ball for determining whether or not the game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start opening H10. The first big winning opening entrance judging means MJ11-C10 and the second big winning opening C20 for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the first big winning opening C10. And a second big winning opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number) and an auxiliary game for determining whether the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired and acquiring the random number based on the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol change permission is lowered. -A, it is determined whether or not to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, and based on the determination result, the random number is granted the symbol variation permission The second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game acquired in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not granted It is determined whether or not the random number is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted. And have.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporary storage in the form of Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN determines whether or not the special game is stopped and whether or not the second main game electric accessory B11d is open / closed, and the lottery means MN10 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number. There is a symbol content determining means MN40 and a variation mode determining unit MN50 for determining a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol based on each random number. Here, the winning / losing lottery means MN10 makes a decision to shift to a special game if the winning lottery result is a win (for example, internally turns on the winning flag), First main game win / fail lottery means MN11-A for performing a lottery for the main game symbols, second main game pass / fail lottery means MN11-B for performing the lottery for the second main game symbols, and win / fail for the auxiliary game symbols Auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H for performing lottery is provided. Here, the first main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winning / failing lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the lottery regarding the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN41ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN41ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of them has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Next, the symbol content determination unit MN40 acquires the first main game content determination unit MN41-A that determines the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number), and the acquisition Based on the played game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game content determination means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game content determination means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the gaming state (for example, for the gaming state, for the normal game → the first main game normal gaming state). Lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol, The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the gaming state (for example, with regard to the gaming state, the lottery for the normal game → the second main game normal gaming state) Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The lottery table MN41ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). Based on the MN 51-A and the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B that determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol, Auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H that determines a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number, and a variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the main game symbol at the limited frequency. Limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 for determination.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal (Game state lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, with regard to the game state, normal game → second main game normal game) State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN51ta-H which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol, and determines the auxiliary game variation mode determination. The lottery table for MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table). Further, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a table that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol at the limited frequency, such as the game state and the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game. In order to determine which table of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to be referred to, the table to be referred to is determined. A limited frequency counter MN52c that counts the number of times the main game symbol has changed since the game has ended, and limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information related to the limited frequency (such as flag on / off). Have. When the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the variation mode selection rate is changed with reference to the common table (that is, the variation mode to be selected). The method is the same (but the selection rate is different) (or the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, but a further fixed value is added to the variation time value related to the selected variation mode. Or the like) may be adopted.

  Here, the limited frequency means that the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (limited frequency state) different from the type and / or selectivity.

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C that controls to stop display after changing the first main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20, assist for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has first and second main game symbol variation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening and closing the electric combination B11d of the second main game start opening B10 is satisfied. Second main game start port electric combination opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and second main game start port electric combination for measuring the driving (opening) time of the electric combination B11d of the second main game start port B10 And an object release timer MP22t-B.

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game execution means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) Details are not shown).

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. Has a short-time game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the probability change game end condition determination means MP51 and the time-short game end condition determination means MP52 each have a probability change count counter MP51c capable of counting the probability change count and a time-short count counter MP52c capable of counting the time limit count. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the opening extension time of the electric accessory B11d of the second main game starting port B10 is relatively extended (opening time extension function). In addition, the time shortening game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes in the first main game symbol and the number of changes in the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number. That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. (A so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as a stop symbol related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbol (auxiliary game symbol satisfying the change start condition). Means MB11b-H are provided.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 that controls the information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, background effect display control means SM23 for determining background image determination processing and display control processing, notice effect display control means SM24 for controlling determination effect display processing and display control processing, and reach effect content It has a reach effect display control means SM25 that governs the determination process and the display control process, and a hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 for executing the hold prefetch effect.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information related to the hold related to the decorative design.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores information related to the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. Continued with a background stage related information temporary storage means SM23b for the purpose, a stay stage management counter SM23c that counts how many times the main game symbols have changed in the specific game state from the end of the special game to switch the stage And a consecutive resort number counter SM23c2 that counts the number of wins in succession during a specific game.

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and display timing of the notice effect, and the information related to the notice effect display. Is temporarily stored in advance notice related information SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is based on information from the main control board M side, reach effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach production temporary information storage means SM25b for temporarily storing and production content determination table SM25ta which is a table for determining production content such as reach production.

  Next, the hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the hold pre-reading effect can be executed (for example, whether or not there is a hold that is expected to be a big hit in the hold). And a pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c for managing the progress of the reserved pre-reading effect when the reserved pre-reading effect is executed over a plurality of variations of the main game symbol.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so that information can be transmitted. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20 and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  Next, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button in step 1002, and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E is checked. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit in the transmission process), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1550, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1910, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determining means MH) wins the winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is executed, and a process for managing the result is executed. Next, at step 1920, the main control board M executes external signal output processing (information output to the external terminal board, hall computer H, etc.). Next, in step 1930, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entry determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball has entered (inflow, passed in the case of a gate) into the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on what number of the hold is in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when No in step 1102 and step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H, and the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP21-B accesses the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and holds the ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary game side game state (flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, auxiliary game) When the time reduction flag is on, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than when it is off), and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H.

  Here, the right side of the figure is an example of a lottery table for determining an auxiliary game stop symbol. As shown in the table, in this example, there are “D0, D1, D2” as the stop symbols, and “D1, D2” as the stop symbols as the winning symbols. In the non-time-reduced game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the open mode is (0.2 seconds open → closed), and the open mode of the electric combination that will be opened is stopped. When the symbol is “D2”, the release mode is (open for 0.2 seconds → closed for 0.8 seconds → opened for 5.0 seconds, closed) (longest open). In the time-saving game, when the stopped symbol is “D1”, the release mode is (1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → 1 second closed → 1 second open → closed). When the symbol is “D2”, the opening mode is configured to be (open for 0.2 seconds → close for 0.8 seconds → open for 4.0 seconds → close). It should be noted that the stop symbol is likely to be a lost symbol “D0” during non-time-reduced games, and the stop symbol is likely to be a winning symbol “D1” during time-reduced games.

  Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H determines the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 1 second when the auxiliary game short flag is on and 10 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the hold information recorded in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the hold ball related to the auxiliary game symbol. At the same time, after the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP11t-H, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol change display on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g.

  Next, in step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. Then, at step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “hit” (D1 · D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main gaming electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B is based on the winning symbol on the auxiliary game side, and in the opening mode (for example, in the case of the winning symbol “D1”, Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Close for 1 second → Open for 1 second → Open in the case of “D2”, 0.2 seconds open, 0.8 seconds closed, 5 seconds An opening mode to be opened) is determined, and a predetermined time related to the opening time (opening / closing time) of the electric winning is set in the second main game start opening electric winning opening timer MP22t-B. Next, in Step 1234, the second main gaming electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. In step 1236, the second main game electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game electric accessory B11d in the second main game starting port B10. Next, in step 1238, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1239, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game stop symbol, and whether or not the stop symbol is a predetermined hit symbol (D2 in this example). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 1239, in step 1240, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is information indicating that the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started. The longest object release start command is set, and the process proceeds to step 1242. In the present embodiment, when the main game short flag is off and the auxiliary game stop symbol is the predetermined hit symbol (D2), the time for which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is kept open is the longest. Has been.

  Next, in step 1242, the second main game electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start opening electric accessory release timer MP22t-B, and determines the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric accessory. Determine whether the time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1242, in step 1244 and step 1246, the second main game electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game electric accessory B11d in the second main game starting port B10, Turn off the open flag of the electric utility item in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1248, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H is an information indicating that the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d has ended, and is an electric accessory longest release end command to the sub side. Is set, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If No in Step 1202, the process proceeds to Step 1242. If No in Step 1204, the process proceeds to Step 1224, and No in Step 1206, Step 1224, Step 1230, Step 1238, Step 1239, and Step 1242. In this case, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol display in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start entrance entrance information from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. Is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and determines the main game (especially the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, the winning lottery random number for determining the success / failure, the symbol lottery random number for determining the winning symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control means MJ30 sets information (holding occurrence command) indicating that the first main game random number has been acquired in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of step 1930).

  Next, in step 1312, the second main game start entrance ball judging means MJ11-B enters the second main game start entrance ball from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. It is determined whether or not information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (particularly the second main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1314, in step 1316, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in step 1318, the second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sets information (holding occurrence command) indicating that the second main game random number has been acquired in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM ( Is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930), and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). In the case of No in Step 1302 and Step 1304, the process proceeds to Step 1312. In the case of No in Step 1312 and Step 1314, the process proceeds to the next process (Process of Step 1400).

  In this embodiment, information indicating that a random number has been acquired is transmitted as information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in Step 1310 and Step 1320. However, the information on the random number value and the main game symbol are transmitted. The number of reservations may be attached and transmitted, and the information indicating that a random number has been acquired can be substituted by these pieces of information.

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and the next process {the process of steps 1400 (1) and (2)} Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and performs the next process {steps 1400 (1) and (2). Process}.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is that the special game is not being played (or the condition device is being operated), the main game symbol is not changing, and there is a hold of the main game symbol. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B), and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion processing). Next, at step 1410-1, the success / failure lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state. Based on 1 main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, a winning lottery random number), a main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 1) is an example of a first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability variation gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability variation gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this.

  Next, in step 1410-2, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) selects the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second With reference to the main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B), the main game based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Stop symbols related to the symbols are determined, and these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “4A, 5A, 7A” and “4B, 5B, 7B”) are selected. One main game symbol is configured to be determined as a jackpot symbol. The number of special game rounds determined with reference to the main game symbol is 8R for 4A, 4B, 5A, and 5B, and 16R for 7A and 7B. Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are only examples, and the present invention is not limited to this. {For example, a lose symbol is not limited to one type of symbol, and a plurality of types of symbols may be provided. May}

  Next, in step 1411, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN 52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN 52 c and determines whether or not the counter value is 0. In the case of Yes in step 1411, in other words, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time-reduced gaming state), in step 1412, first main game variation mode determining means MN51 -A (second main game variation) The mode determining means MN51-B) refers to the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) corresponding to each game state, and the main game symbol Based on the result of the lottery determination and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the fluctuation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and these are determined as the first and second main games. The symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C is temporarily stored, and the process proceeds to Step 1414.

  Here, FIG. 11 (main game table 3) is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). As shown in this example, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode (variation time) of the main game symbol is determined based on the result of lottery determination of the main game symbol. That is, when the result of the main game symbol is a winning lottery, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long is easily determined. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of stop symbol, the selection rate, or the like. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, the main game table 3 is not configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls, but is configured to have a different table according to the number of reserved balls. It goes without saying. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game time reduction flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol on the second main game side When the change is configured to be advantageous for the player, the second main game side is likely to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). This is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, in other words, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, in step 1450, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN 52 executes a limited frequency variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1413, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter MN52c, and proceeds to step 1414. Further, the process of step 1413 may be executed immediately after the result of step 1420 becomes Yes (timing at which the variation time ends).

  Next, in step 1414, the game content determination means MN determines the commands (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) related to the main game symbols temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , Change mode information, etc.) and a command (symbol change display start instruction command) relating to the current gaming state are set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission processing in step 1930) Is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side). Next, in step 1415, the first and second main game symbol variation time management means 1202 sets a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, in step 1416, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display part A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1417, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1420.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1419, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1419, the process proceeds to step 1420. If No in step 1419, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1420, in step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1930). Next, in step 1423, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1430, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1430, in step 1431, the game content determination means MN sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter. In addition, in this example, it is comprised so that it may transfer to a specific game state (process of the probability variation game state with number limitation, and time reduction game state) after completion | finish of the special game which concerns on all the jackpot symbols. Next, in step 1440, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1500. On the other hand, if No in step 1430, the process proceeds to step 1500.

  Next, at step 1500, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1550). Even in the case of No in step 1420, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. First, at step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). . In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination first lottery table MN52ta-1, and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, the main game The variation mode (variation time) related to the symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 13 (limited frequency table 1) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 1 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. In addition, compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3, the limited frequency table 1 is configured to have the shortest average variation time. The limited frequency table 1 is configured to refer to the same table regardless of the number of reserved balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1456, in step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination second lottery table MN52ta-2, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, the second main game. Based on the number of reserved balls on the side, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  Here, FIG. 13 (limited frequency table 2) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 2 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. Further, the fluctuation time at the time of hit is relatively longer than the fluctuation time at the time of loss. The limited frequency table 2 is configured to have the longest average fluctuation time as compared with the limited frequency table 2 and the limited frequency table 3. Further, the limited frequency table 2 is configured such that the average variation time is shorter when there are two or three reserved balls than when there are zero or one reserved balls.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1456, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 determines the limited frequency variation. With reference to the mode determination third lottery table MN52ta-3, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game random number and the lottery result, and the next process (the process of step 1413) is performed. Transition.

  Here, FIG. 13 (limited frequency table 3) is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table 3 is referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is within a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). The tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side have the same contents. In addition, the variation time that can be selected in the limited frequency table 3 is only one type, and is constant regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls.

  Note that the content of the limited frequency table is not limited to this, and the content of the limited frequency table to be referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side is only in a predetermined stage (for example, the first stage). You may comprise so that it may become the same. Further, in a predetermined stage (for example, the third stage), the variation mode may be determined regardless of the number of holdings (both on the first main game side and the second main game side). Otherwise, the first main game side selects the variation mode from the same table regardless of the number of holds, and on the second main game side, if the number of holds is a predetermined number or more, the number of holds It is desirable to have a relatively shorter variation time than when the number is less than or equal to the predetermined number.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of limited frequency tables, and the configuration is such that the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 is switched in three stages in this order (so-called three-stage ST). However, there is no problem even if the number of types of the limited frequency tables is changed and the order of the tables to be referenced is changed. Furthermore, there are two tables, a limited frequency table 1 and a limited frequency table 2, and the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 1 as a three-stage ST mode. Also good.

  Next, FIG. 14 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. First, at step 1502, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1502, in step 1504, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c. In the case of Yes in step 1504, in step 1506, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1510. Note that if the answer is No in step 1502 or 1506, the process proceeds to step 1510.

  Next, in step 1510, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1510, in step 1512, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1514, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1514, in step 1516, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1518, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1550). Note that if the answer is No in step 1510 or step 1514, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1550).

  Next, FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the special game operating condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, in step 1552, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1554, the special game control means MP30 determines that the specific game flag (main game probability change flag / main game short flag / auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, at step 1556, the specific game control means MB30b clears the value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, at step 1558, the specific game control means MB30b clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1560, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1562, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1600). In the case of No in step 1552, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604 and step 1606, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and the special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1607, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1608, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In step 1930, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1612.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1602, in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1610, the process proceeds to step 1612. In the case of No in step 1610, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

  Next, in step 1612, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1612, that is, when it is just before the start of each round, first, in step 1614, the special game execution means MP33 is set to the release pattern set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (for example, keeps releasing). Open pattern and open / close pattern). Next, in step 1616, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1618, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1620, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is opened, and a special game timer MP34t (particularly, an opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to start, and the process proceeds to step 1622. . On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1612, that is, when the big prize opening is being opened, the process proceeds to step 1622 without performing the processing of steps 1614 to 1620.

  Next, in step 1622, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side in the control command transmission process of step 1930). Next, in step 1624, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. ) Is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1624, the process proceeds to step 1628. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1624, in step 1626, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) to determine a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) related to the special prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1626, the process proceeds to step 1628. In the case of No in step 1626, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, in step 1628, the special game executing means MP33 sets the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1630, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (especially an opening time timer). Next, in step 1632, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1633, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1634, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1634, in step 1636, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1638, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1930). Then, in step 1650, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1910). Even in the case of No in step 1634, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the game state determination processing after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 in FIG. First, in step 1652, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the probability variation number counter MP51c. Next, in step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. Next, at step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Next, in step 1658, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1910).

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 19 is a main flowchart on the sub control board S side (particularly on the sub main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is stored). If received, the sub-side RAM is initialized, various information commands are received, and the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (f) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (f) is executed, as shown in the process of (f) of the figure, first, in step 2050, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs a stay stage determination process to be described later. Execute. Next, in step 2100, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a hold information management process described later. Next, in step 2200, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, at step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2900, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes a display command transmission control process (transmits commands set in these series of subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2050 to S2900) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5E is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is sent to one terminal (in this example) of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM. , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (e). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (eg, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2050 in FIG. First, in step 2052, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the specific game has started on the main side (in this example, transition to the probability variation / time reduction game state). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2052, in step 2054, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2056, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2066.

  Here, the specific game running flag is a flag indicating a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, so-called ST), and is turned on when the specific game starts. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2052, in Step 2058, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the specific game has ended {for example, determination with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, or stay Determine whether the value of the stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs)}. In the case of Yes in step 2058, in step 2060, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2062, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2064, the background effect display control means SM23 counts the consecutive game count counter SM23c2 (a counter for counting the number of consecutive big hits during a specific game, and the value is added in the processing of step 2410 described later. ) Is reset (cleared to zero), and the process proceeds to Step 2066. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2058, the process proceeds to Step 2066.

  Next, in step 2066, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game running flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 2066, in Step 2068, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2068, in step 2070, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and proceeds to step 2072. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2068, the process proceeds to step 2072 without executing the process of step 2070.

  Next, in Step 2072, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. In the case of Yes in Step 2072, in Step 2074, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “short effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (Step 2100). The process proceeds to (1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2072, in Step 2076, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2076, in step 2078, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “long effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2100). The process proceeds to (1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2076, in step 2080, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2080, in step 2082, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “fixed effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2100). The process proceeds to (1). Note that if the answer is No in steps 2066 and 2080 (for example, when the game is not in a specific game), the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2100).

  In the present embodiment, the third stage (fixed effect stage) has only one type (5 seconds in this example) and one type of effect content (in this example, prefetching), regardless of the result of the lottery. Although the display content is different at the time of non-prefetching, the system is only a fixed time effect), but a plurality of variation modes and effect contents may be provided. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the number of types of production contents in the third stage is smaller than that in the second stage (long production stage). As the tendency, it is desirable that the number of types of both the variation pattern and the production content is “second stage> first stage> third stage”.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to switch the stay stage for determining the production contents based on the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c that counts the number of symbol fluctuations during the specific game.

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a new electric machine longest release start command has been received from the main control board M side. To do. In the case of Yes in Step 2102, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is started, in Step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily stores the drawing hold information. The electric component longest open flag in the flag area of the means SM22b is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2102, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and issues a new electric accessory longest release end command from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not it has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2106, in other words, when the longest release of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is completed, in step 2108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold information temporary storage means. The electric utility longest open flag in the flag area of SM22b is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 2110. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2106, the process proceeds to step 2110.

  Here, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is the period during which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is opened in the release mode in which the time for which the second main game start opening B11d is continuously opened is the longest (longest open). Is used to determine that the hold that occurred when the longest open flag of the electric accessory is on is based on the entry of the game ball that has been opened for the longest time. It is a flag. In the present embodiment, the longest open flag of the electric accessory is turned on only in the non-time-saving game.

  Next, in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and receives a new hold occurrence command (first main game symbol or second main game) from the main control board M side. It is determined whether or not the hold information related to the symbol has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays a drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, “1” is added (incremented) to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 2114, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side, and holds information (in particular, a random value related to the main game symbol lottery, for example, Random lottery random numbers / design lottery random numbers / variation mode random numbers) are temporarily stored in the design hold information temporary storage means SM22b.

  Next, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the longest open electric accessory flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2116, in step 2118, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the newly temporarily held hold is a hold on the second main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2118, in step 2120, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 adds information indicating that the hold has occurred at the time of the longest release of the electric accessory to the newly temporarily stored hold information. 2122. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2116 or step 2118, the process proceeds to step 2122 without executing the process in step 2120.

  Next, in step 2122, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 pre-determines whether or not each hold is successful based on the hold information (especially a lottery random number) that is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. To do. Next, in step 2124, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not there is a hold that is a winning (big hit) among the holds that are consumed before the new hold based on the result of the prior determination. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2124, in step 2150, a prefetch effect execution determination process described later is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2142. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2124, the process proceeds to step 2142 without executing the process in step 2150. Next, in step 2142, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 makes full use of the effect display means SS on the effect display device SG (in particular, the first hold display portion SG12 and the second hold display portion SG13). The same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value in the figure hold information temporary storage means SM22b are turned on, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2200).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, whether the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2130. Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2130, in step 2132, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts (decrements) “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2134, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 deletes the hold information related to the symbol variation from the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and shifts the remaining hold information.

  Next, in step 2136, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the digested hold is a hold generated when the electric utility object is fully opened. In the case of Yes in step 2136, in step 2138, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 turns on the longest release hold permission permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. 2140. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2136, the process proceeds to step 2140 without executing the process in step 2138. It should be noted that the longest opening effect is generated only when the symbol relating to the entry changes (or the occurrence) when entering the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d when the electric accessory is longest open. For example, a change in the hold display mode, a change in the selected content of the effect (a change in the background or notice content), and the like.

  Next, in step 2140, the sub game control means (sub main control part) SM turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2142. . In the case of No in step 2130, the process of steps 2132 to 2140 is not executed, the process proceeds to step 2142, the hold display process is performed, and then the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2200). To do.

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. First, in step 2152, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the newly generated hold is a hold on the second main game side. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2156, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the stay stage currently set (temporary storage) is “long effect stage”. It is determined whether or not.

  In the case of Yes in step 2156, in step 2158, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is based on the hold information (particularly, the variation mode determination random number, etc.) temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Pre-determine new hold variation time. Next, in step 2160, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold variation time is determined to be equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Here, when the change time is preliminarily determined, for example, when the change mode random number value of the new hold is 900 to 1023, the change time is 10 seconds or more regardless of the hold number at the time of the new hold. Can be determined (see FIG. 13).

  In the case of Yes in step 2160, in step 2162, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on the winning lottery random number). . In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3), and proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5, but it may be lower than the winning probability in step 2164). A pre-reading effect lottery to be won is executed, and the flow shifts to step 2176.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2156, in step 2168, the hold prefetching effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the stay stage currently set (temporary storage) is “fixed effect”. It is determined whether or not it is a “stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the new hold is a hold that becomes a big hit (for example, determination based on the winning lottery random number). . In the case of Yes in step 2170, in step 2172, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a pre-reading effect lottery that is won with a predetermined probability (for example, ¼), and the process proceeds to step 2176. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2170, in step 2174, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k has a predetermined probability (for example, 1/6, but may be lower than the winning probability in step 2172). A pre-reading effect lottery to be won is executed, and the flow shifts to step 2176.

  Next, in step 2176, the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the pre-reading effect lottery (the lottery of any of step 2164, step 2166, step 2172, or step 2174) has been won. In the case of Yes in step 2176, in step 2178, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the number of holds temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and holds that won the lottery (trigger hold). Deriving the number Ha (0 to 4 times) of fluctuation stoppage of the main game symbol until the game is digested. Next, in step 2180, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and based on the counter value, determines the number of times Hb the variable game has stopped until the current stay stage ends. To derive.

  Here, the fluctuation stop count Hb includes the fluctuation stop count of the symbol that is currently being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as described later, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined at the time of starting the change. is there.

  Next, in step 2182, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determination unit SM26k executes the pre-reading effect (Ha in this example) is the minimum number of pre-reading effects (the minimum number of times for executing an effective pre-reading effect). For example, it is determined whether or not it is two times or more. In the case of Yes in step 2182, in step 2184, the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k satisfies the relationship Ha and Hb derived Ha and Hb (the pre-reading effect ends during the current stay stage). Whether or not). In the case of Yes in step 2184, in step 2186, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2142). Note that if any of Step 2152, Step 2154, Step 2160, Step 2168, Step 2176, Step 2182, and Step 2184 is No, the processing proceeds to the next processing (Step 2142 processing).

  In this way, when the pre-reading effects over a plurality of variations are not completed during the current stay stage, the pre-reading effects are not executed (in particular, step 2184), so that the table switching and the pre-reading effects are executed simultaneously. This is not done, and it is possible to avoid a situation that confuses the player. In the present embodiment, after the pre-reading effect lottery is executed, whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed is determined according to the determination as to whether or not the stay stage is crossed. The order may be changed as appropriate, for example, it may be configured to execute a pre-reading effect lottery after it is determined to cross the stay stage (that is, when it is planned to cross the stay stage, In the first place, it also includes a configuration that does not execute the pre-reading effect lottery itself).

  Note that the pre-reading effect in this example may include a change related to the trigger hold in the effect that occurs even with the change related to the trigger hold, that is, the plurality of changes in the pre-read effect over a plurality of changes. For example, an effect in which an effect of the same mode or an effect of the same system is generated from a change before the change related to the trigger hold to a change related to the trigger hold.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, even when the end of the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations is after the end of the current stay stage (or switching), the pre-reading effect can be executed, When the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations straddles the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the expectation that becomes a big hit in any of the fluctuations related to the pre-reading effect does not straddle the end (or switching) of the stay stage. You may comprise so that it may be relatively higher than the case where production is performed. In such a configuration, it becomes possible to attract the player's attention on whether or not the pre-reading effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage (and effect), and the interest of the game It will be possible to improve the nature.

  In addition, when the pre-reading effect can be executed even when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of fluctuations is after the end (or switching) of the current stay stage, the pre-reading effect is until the final change at which the current stay stage ends. It may be configured to end (suspend) at. In addition, when the pre-reading effect is interrupted, a pre-reading effect different from the interrupted pre-reading effect (for example, a pre-reading effect or other effect corresponding to the effect at the stay stage after switching) can be executed instead. May be.

  In addition, in a certain stay stage, a high-awaiting effect or a pre-reading effect informing that a variation mode having a long variation time is selected in subsequent fluctuations, and the high-expectedness effect or When the variation mode with a long variation time is not selected, the high expectation effect or the variation mode with a long variation time may be selected at the next stay stage. In such a configuration, it is desirable that the pre-reading effect in the next stay stage is an effect in accordance with the next stay stage.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. First, in step 2202, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2206, the design display content determining means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determining means SM24n, the reach effect display content determining means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main information temporary storage means SM11b (symbol information ( Referring to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol Is determined to be a flat pattern such as “7.7.7” or a lost symbol such as “1.3.5”} and a variation mode, and the display display related information temporary storage means SM21b ( And temporary notice related information temporary storage means SM24b and reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25b).

  Next, in step 2250, the drawing display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n and the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) execute an effect content determination process described later. Next, in step 2208, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2300 processing). Transition. Note that, also in the case of No in step 2202, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 23 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, at step 2252, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the specific game running flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the longest release hold effect permission flag is off. Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2254, in step 2256, the reach effect display control means SM25 determines the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly the normal time table (longest open time hold effect permission flag off) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol}. }, The contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2254, in step 2258, the reach effect display control means SM25 turns off the longest release time hold permission permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2260, the reach effect display control means SM25 is in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b.
Turn on the effect execution flag for holding when the longest is open. Next, in step 2262, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta {particularly, the normal time table (longest open time hold permission permission flag on}) based on the variation mode of the main game symbol. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, FIG. 24 is an example of the effect content determination table SM25ta. In particular, the normal performance content determination table is a table that is referred to when determining the performance in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and based on the variation mode of the main game symbol as shown in the figure. , One effect content is determined from a plurality of effect content candidates. In addition, when the longest open-time hold production permission flag is on, an effect similar to the production during the stay in the “long production stage” is determined (the longest open-time hold production permission flag is set). If it is “off”, the player can easily recognize that the effect during the stay in the “long stage” does not occur during the non-time-reduced game, and that the change is related to the hold that occurred at the time of the longest release. it can). In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this, and for example, the production is performed with reference to the variation mode (and the lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same).

  Returning to the description of the flowchart, on the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, that is, in the case where the current gaming state is the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, in step 2264, the reach effect display control means SM 25 Referring to the execution counter SM26c, it is determined whether or not the counter value is greater than 0 (a situation in which a prefetch effect is executed). In the case of Yes in step 2264, in step 2266, the pending prefetch effect execution control means SM26 decrements (decrements) the value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2268, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the currently set stay stage is the “long effect stage”. In the case of Yes in step 2268, in step 2270, the hold prefetching effect execution control means SM26 reads a prefetching effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “at the beginning of the change XX times ...!” And the prefetching effect execution counter SM26c. The command for displaying the effect of counting down the value of () is set, and the process proceeds to Step 2274.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2268, in other words, when the prefetching effect is executed in the “fixed effect stage”, in step 2272, the holding prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the “fixed effect stage” is changed. The stage content is determined as a pre-read stage stage effect (for example, a stage display color changing stage based on the big hit expectation level), and the process proceeds to step 2274. In the case of No in step 2264, the process proceeds to step 2274.

  Next, at step 2274, the reach effect display control means SM25 refers to the effect content determination table SM25ta (particularly, the table for specific games) based on the main game symbol variation mode and the currently set stay stage. Then, the contents of the effect are determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2208).

  Here, the specific game time effect content determination table in FIG. 24 is a table that is referred to when determining the effect in the probability variation game state and the time-reduced game state (80 STs in this example). As shown, the content of the effect is switched according to the set stay stage (the number of times of variation during the ST) (the content of the effect is also switched in response to the change of the variation mode / variation time of the main game symbol). Configured). An example of the content of the production will be described. The fixed time production, which is the production selected as the “fixed production stage”, starts with the variation of the decorative design, as shown in the image diagram at the bottom of the figure. When the image related to the change is displayed for 1 second, the effect at the success / failure stage is displayed for 1 second. Here, the effect at the success / failure stage is an image that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB if the pre-reading effect is not executed, and after the effect is displayed, there is an operation of the sub input button SB or for another 1 second. When the time elapses, the display shifts to the effect display in the success / failure notification stage. On the other hand, if the pre-reading effect is being executed, the effect at the success / failure stage is the effect that the display color of the background image changes determined in the process of step 2268 (ie, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB does not occur). ), And when one second elapses after the effect display, the display shifts to the effect display in the success / failure notification stage. Next, in the success / failure notification stage, an effect is provided to notify the player whether the change is a win or a loss. When the pre-reading effect continues, the execution state of the pre-reading effect (in this example, the background display color) may be inherited until the end of the pre-reading effect. When the fixed time has passed), an image for notifying the result of the change is displayed. In addition, this example is only an example, and the content of the production, the variation mode, the configuration of the table, etc. are not limited to this, and for example, the production is performed with reference to the variation mode (and the lottery result) of the main game symbol and the random number. You may comprise so that the content may be determined (It may comprise so that a different production can be performed when the fluctuation | variation aspect of the main game side is the same). Although not specifically shown in the present example, a dedicated effect (for example, a super battle reach, a special battle reach, etc.) is executed at any stay stage during the specific game even when the first main game side holds out. You may comprise so that it may obtain. In addition, the effect that prompts the operation of the sub input button SB may be configured not to be executed in a situation where the effect execution scale is difficult to secure (for example, when staying in the “short effect stage” in this example). Is preferred.

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, in step 2302, the decorative design display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the design display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the design content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2309, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2310. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to step 2310.

  Next, in step 2310, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2310, in step 2311, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2312, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2312, in step 2314, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). Then, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2312, in step 2316, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2316, in step 2318, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). The process proceeds to step 2330.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2316, in step 2320, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2320, in step 2322, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2900). At step 2330, the process proceeds to step 2330. Note that if the result in Step 2320 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2330.

  Next, in step 2330, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 2330, in step 2331, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets the decorative symbol stop display command (determined display command) (transmits to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To be). Next, in step 2332, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2334, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of step 2400). To do. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2310 or Step 2330, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the special game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2404, in step 2406, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the big hit is not the initial hit (the big hit in the non-probability variation / non-time shortened gaming state). It is determined whether or not. If YES in step 2406, the process proceeds to step 2410. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2406 (if it is the first hit), in step 2408, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and the effect for holding at the longest open time It is determined whether or not the execution flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2408, in step 2409, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the longest open effect execution flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and goes to step 2410. Transition.

  Next, in step 2410, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to the value of the extended game count counter SM23c2, and proceeds to step 2412. In the case of No in step 2408, the process proceeds to step 2412.

  Next, in step 2412 and step 2414, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and makes a big hit on the effect display device SG. Start display is performed (display is appropriately performed based on the type of jackpot), and the process proceeds to step 2416. In the case of No in step 2402, the process proceeds to step 2416.

  Next, in step 2416, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the winning number on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpot It may be executed as needed based on the type). Next, in step 2418, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the consecutive resort number counter SM23c2, and determines whether or not the counter value is a predetermined value (for example, 10) or more. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. -It is determined whether it is a big hit (7B symbol). In the case of Yes in step 2420, in step 2422, the background effect display control means SM23 determines the ending effect {predetermined conditions (for example, the number of consecutive games during a specific game, the total number of balls earned during consecutive games, and a plurality of types of identification). A command related to the display of special game or production during specific game, which is displayed only when a condition of one or a plurality of combinations such as generation of all effects is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step 2426. On the other hand, if the answer is No in either step 2418 or step 2420, in step 2424, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the big hit in-progress display, and proceeds to step 2426.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the effect displayed during the jackpot execution a special effect based on the number of consecutive hits of the jackpot (the initial hit is not counted), and the second main game start opening In the case where a big hit is caused by the holding caused by the entry of the electric accessory B11d during the longest opening, even if the big hit is the first hit, the second main game start opening electric combination is counted as the number of consecutive games. It is possible to attract the player's interest at the time of the change related to the hold that occurs during the longest release of the object B11d. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when there are a plurality of conditions as conditions for generating an ending effect, at least one of the plurality of conditions (for example, a big hit with a specific effect) , Etc.) may be considered to be satisfied.

  Next, in step 2426, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the background effect display control means SM23 performs jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs display appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2430, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2900). . Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2900).

(Function)
Next, the effect | action in this embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetch effect during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a specific game is completed without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, in the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, after the number of holding balls on the first main game side is digested and the number of holding balls on the second main game side becomes four, at the timing of 1 in the figure The second main game symbol will start to change. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the main game symbol fluctuates 30 times after the special game, the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is entered.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long production stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first second main game symbol has started to change after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long performance stage is a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus the change time is 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the pre-reading effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 1 (Ha> Hb). Will not be. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 70 times after the special game, the long effect stage is ended and the process proceeds to the fixed effect stage.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, since the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger pending digest is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the fixed performance stage is 10 (Ha ≦ Hb), the pre-reading effect is executed. Will be. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the prefetch effect is executed from the change. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the pre-reading effect is ended when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends. Note that since the prefetching effect is a prefetching effect in the fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time related to the trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game, the fixed effect stage ends and the specific game also ends.

  Next, the operation in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, under the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the first variation in the specific game is started. As shown in the lower part of the figure, at the time of losing, the limited frequency table 1 on the first main game side and the limited frequency table 1 on the second main game side have the same table contents and do not depend on the number of holds. . In this case (the contents of the table surrounded by a dotted line in the limited frequency table 1) is X. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, the first main game symbol change that becomes the second change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. There is one hold on the first main game side at the start of the fluctuation of the first main game symbol related to this timing, and there is one hold on the first main game side at the start of change of the first main game symbol related to the timing shown in FIG. Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the third variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side is changed from three to two due to the change. At the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there are three holds on the second main game side, and at the start of the fluctuation of the second main game symbol related to timing 3 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Although there is one, the table contents to be referred to are X regardless of the number of holds.

  Thus, in this example, during the short stage, regardless of whether the change is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and regardless of the number of holds, the change mode is determined. The contents of the referenced table are the same.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is finished, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 31st variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that is the 32nd variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the second main game side, and at the start of the change of the second main game symbol related to the timing 6 in the figure, the hold on the second main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol that becomes the 33rd variation in the specific game is started. The table content to be referred to when the timing is changed is Z. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, the change of the first main game symbol that becomes the 34th change in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to when the timing is changed are Y. Further, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side changes from 1 to 0 due to the change. At the start of the change of the first main game symbol related to this timing, there is one hold on the first main game side, and at the beginning of the change of the first main game symbol related to the timing 8 in the figure, the hold on the first main game side is Since there are two, the table contents to be referred to differ depending on the difference in the number of holds (Y and Z).

  In this way, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode are the same regardless of whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side during the long performance stage. However, when the number of holdings is different, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode can be different.

  The contents of the table when determining the variation mode of the main game symbol during a specific game are not limited to this, and an example of the operation will be described with reference to FIG. First, the figure is an action diagram showing a variation mode of a main game symbol during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a long production stage is complete | finished without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, at the timing of 1 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the second variation in the specific game is started. Also, as shown in the lower part of the figure, the variation mode of the second main game symbol has different table contents depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side at the time of losing. A case where there is a hold on the first main game side is defined as X '. The case where there is no hold on the first main game side is set as Y ′. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are X ′ because there is a hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change. Next, at the timing 2 in the figure, the variation of the first main game symbol, which is the fourth variation in the specific game, is started. Due to the change, the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is changed from 1 to 0. Next, at the timing 3 in the figure, the second main game symbol that is the fifth variation in the specific game is started. The table contents to be referred to at the time of this timing change are Y 'because there is no hold on the first main game side. Further, the number of reserved balls on the second main game side changes from two to one due to the change.

  Thus, in this example, the contents of the table referred to when determining the variation mode on the second main game side during the short performance stage are configured to differ depending on whether or not there is a hold on the first main game side.

  Next, at the timing 4 in the figure, since the change of the main game symbol, which is the 30th change in the specific game, is ended, the short effect stage is ended and the long effect stage is switched. Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the variation of the second main game symbol that becomes the 32nd variation in the specific game is started, and at the timing of 6 in the diagram, the second main game that becomes the 35th variation in the specific game. The design changes. At the start of the change of the second main game symbol at the timing of 5 in the figure, the number of the first main game side is one hold, whereas the change of the second main game symbol at the timing of 6 in the figure At the time, the number of holds on the first main game side is zero, but the table contents referred to when determining the variation mode of the second main game symbol are the same, and the variation time is 10 seconds. ing.

  With the configuration as described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the number of times of change of the main game symbol is predetermined in the game in the probability variation game state (and the time shortening game state) with the number of times limited. In response to the number of times, the candidates for the variation mode (variation time) to be selected are different (switched). In addition, by changing the contents of the effect according to the change of the change mode, the mode of the effect is changed in accordance with the progress of the game in the specific game {probability change game state with a limited number of times (and time-saving game state)}. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game.

(Modification 1 from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, when the pre-reading effect straddles the end of the stay stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pre-reading effect is appropriately executed. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect that further enhances the interest of the game. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of prefetch effect execution determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. 20 in the first modification from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2190 (Modification 1) and Steps 2192 (Modification 1) to Step 2196 (Modification 1), the purpose of which differs between the prefetching effect related to the big hit and the prefetching effect related to the loss. It is to execute processing. That is, in step 2190 (change 1), the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit. In the case of Yes in Step 2190 (Modification 1), the process proceeds to Step 2186. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2190 (Modification 1), in Step 2192 (Modification 1), the holding prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not Ha ≦ Hb, in other words, the prefetch effect is in the current performance stage. It is determined whether or not to end. In the case of Yes in Step 2192 (Modification 1), in Step 2194 (Modification 1), the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 sets Ha to the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next processing (processing of Step 2144). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2192 (Modified 1), in Step 2196 (Modified 1), the holding pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 sets Hb in the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and the next process (the process of Step 2144). Migrate to

  By changing as described above, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the prefetch effect related to the big hit is executed, the prefetch effect is not straddled even when it is scheduled to be executed over the next effect stage. On the other hand, when a pre-reading effect related to losing (so-called “gase effect”) is executed, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stage, the current effect The prefetch effect is configured to end at the final change in the stage, and various prefetch effects are executed, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  Further, in the first modification from the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, the pre-reading effect is also executed as it is when it is scheduled to be executed over the next effect stage. At the time of execution of the pre-reading effect, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stage, the final stage of the stage is ended by the end of the pre-reading effect at the final change in the current stage. When the pre-reading effect is executed by the fluctuation, when the pre-reading effect is continuously executed by the next change, it becomes definite that the pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect related to the big hit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the change in the change of the production stage, and the interest of the game is enhanced. In this embodiment, after executing the pre-reading effect lottery, the pre-reading effect execution possibility determination (and determination of whether or not to interrupt) is performed according to the determination of whether or not to cross the stay stage. However, the order of processing related to the pre-reading effects may be changed as appropriate. For example, the pre-reading effect lottery may be executed after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed.

  In the first modification from the present embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is executed over the next effect stage, it becomes definite that it will be a big hit, and when it ends without straddling the next effect stage. Is configured to be definitive to be lost, but is not limited to this, conversely, it is configured to be a big hit when it ends without straddling the next stage of production Or, even if the pre-reading effect straddles the next effect stage or not straddling, it can be configured to win both big hits and loses, and the degree of expectation that will be a big hit may be different . Also, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, if the pre-reading effect ends with the final change in the current stage, the big hit is deterministic due to the change related to the holding of the big hit (trigger hold). It may be configured to execute the following effects (for example, generation of a notification sound for determining the big hit, dropping of a bonus item for determining the big hit, etc.).

(Modification 2 from this embodiment)
In this embodiment, each stay stage is always switched in the same pattern during a specific game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By providing a plurality of effect switching patterns during a specific game, It is possible to further improve the property. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 31 is an effect content determination table in the second modification from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is that two effect content determination tables (a reference table when selecting a battle mode and a reference table when selecting an escape mode) are provided in the long effect stage. As shown in the figure, the battle mode and the escape mode are configured such that the content of the effect corresponding to the variation mode of the main game symbol is different. In this example, two effect content determination tables are provided only for the long effect stage. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of effect content determination tables may be three or more, and the same applies to other effect stages. A plurality of effect content determination tables may be provided.

  Next, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 18 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are about Step 2425 (Modification 2) and Step 2500 (Modification 2), and the purpose is to execute the effect mode determination process. That is, in step 2425 (odd 2), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the running big hit is the first hit (the big win won in the normal game). In the case of Yes in Step 2425 (Modification 2), in Step 2500 (Modification 2), the background effect display control means SM23 executes an effect mode determination process described later, and proceeds to Step 1426. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2425 (Modification 2), the process proceeds to Step 2426.

  In this example, the effect mode determination process of step 2500 (change 2) is executed only in the case of the first hit. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Good.

  Next, FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2500 (Modification 2) in FIG. 32 in Modification 2 from the present embodiment. First, at step 2502, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the special game round being executed is the effect mode selection round (in this example, the third R). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to image display that prompts the effect mode selection (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900). To be). Next, in Step 2506 (Modification 2), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the sub input button input detection device SBs and determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed. In the case of Yes in step 2506, in step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 switches the effect mode that has been set (for example, battle mode → escape mode, escape mode → battle mode), and proceeds to step 2510. Note that if the answer is No in step 2502 or step 2506, the process proceeds to step 2510.

  Here, in this example, “battle mode” is set at the start of the production mode selection round, and when a power interruption occurs after the production mode is determined, the “battle” which is the default production mode after the power interruption is restored. "Mode" is configured to be reset.

  Next, at step 2510, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether the round of the special game being executed is the effect mode determination round (in this example, the fourth R) or not. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2510, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect mode set at the end of the effect mode selection round (in the display command transmission control process in step 2900, the sub-sub Is transmitted to the control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2426). Even in the case of No in step 2510, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2426).

  By changing as described above, in Modification 2 from the present embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain stay stage, and the effect mode is determined with reference to which effect content table during the special game. The game can be arbitrarily selected by the player, so that the variation of the production during the specific game is increased, and the production can be performed according to the player's taste. The nature will increase.

(Modification 3 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game and the number of changes in the probability-variable gaming state are always set to the same number of changes, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to create a new gameability by making the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game different from the number of changes in the probability-changing gaming state. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a third modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 34 shows a first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display) according to the subroutine of Step 1400 (1) {Step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. It is a flowchart of a process. The changes from this embodiment are about Step 1411-1 (Modification 3), Step 1450 (Modification 3), and Step 1700 (Modification 3), and the purpose thereof is in the specific game after the jackpot is ended by the jackpot symbol. The variation mode of the main game symbol is different. That is, if the limited frequency counter value is 0 in step 1411, in step 1411-1 (variable 3), the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 specifies the specific game in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. The type flag (high profit specific game flag, low profit similar specific game flag, low profit specific game flag) is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1412. On the other hand, if the limited frequency counter value is not 0 in step 1411, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 executes a limited frequency fluctuation mode determining process described later in step 1450 (transition 3), and proceeds to step 1413.

If the stop symbol is a big hit symbol in step 1430, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 executes a limited frequency type determining process described later in step 1700 (variant 3), and the process proceeds to step 1440.
It becomes.

  Next, FIG. 35 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1700 (Modification 3) in FIG. 34 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1702, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in step 1702, in step 1704, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 sets a predetermined number A (for example, 80 times) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1706, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 turns on the long specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1440). .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in other words, if the big hit symbol is a big hit (initial hit) in the normal gaming state, in step 1708, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 makes a big hit in the stopped state. It is determined whether the symbol is a long specific game symbol (in this example, 7A, 7B, 5B, 4B). If YES in step 1708, the process proceeds to step 1704.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1708, in step 1710, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is a similar short specific game symbol (5A in this example). . In the case of Yes in Step 1710, in Step 1712, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets a predetermined number A (for example, 80 times) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1714, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 turns on the similar short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1440). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1710, in other words, when the big hit symbol being stopped is the short specific symbol (4A in this example), in step 1716, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the limited frequency counter MN52c. Is set to a predetermined number of times B (for example, the number of times is 30, but is not limited to this. It is preferable that the number is less than the predetermined number of times A). Next, in step 1718, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 turns on the short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1440). .

  In this example, the long-specific game symbol and the similar short-specific game symbol are symbols that have a relatively large number of changes in the time-saving game state after the execution of the special game related to the symbol. The symbol is a symbol that allows the player to recognize that the number of times the player enters the time-saving gaming state at the start of the specific game related to the symbol is large, and the similar short specific game symbol is However, it is difficult to recognize that the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state is large (the same effect as when the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state is small). Further, the short specific game symbol is a symbol that has a relatively small number of fluctuations in a time-saving game state after the execution of the special game related to the symbol.

  Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1450 (Modification 3) in FIG. 34 in Modification Example 3 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the long specific game flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and whether the counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1454, in step 1456, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 1 in the limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta, and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination, The variation mode (variation time) regarding the game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1454, in step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1458, in step 1460, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 in the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, the second main Based on the number of reserved balls on the game side, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1458, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta, and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination Then, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In addition, the process of the said step 1452-step 1462 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a long specific game.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 4 in the limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta, The variation mode (variation time) regarding the game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1413). In addition, the process of the said step 1464 and step 1466 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a short specific game.

  In the case of No in step 1464, in other words, when the similar short specific game flag is on, in step 1468, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is It is determined whether or not the value is within one range (80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1468, in step 1470, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 4 (table similar to that in the short specific game) in the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining table MN52ta, and the main game Based on the random number on the side and the lottery result, a variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing (step 1413). Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in a short specific game (time-reduced game state in which the number of times of variation that becomes a time-reduced game is less than the number of times of variation that results in a probability-variable game state) Are provided with a plurality of patterns (for example, 30 times in this example, but 20 times, 30 times, 40 times, 50 times, etc.) and a predetermined number in similar short specific games. During the variation period of the number of times (for example, 50 times that is the maximum number of times of time-reduced games in the short specific game, etc.), the same or substantially the same variation pattern (and effect) as in the short specific game is selected. By configuring, it is possible to create a period during which it is difficult for the player to determine how many fluctuations the time-saving game will continue.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1468, in step 1472, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1472, in step 1474, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, the second main Based on the number of reserved balls on the game side, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1472, in step 1476, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table 3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination table MN52ta and based on the main game side random number and the result of lottery determination. Then, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1413). In addition, the process of the said step 1468-step 1476 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a similar short specific game.

  Here, the limited frequency table reference table in the lower part of the figure is a table in which the limited frequency tables to be referred to are collected for each limited frequency counter value in each specific game. As shown in the figure, when the long specific game flag is on, the limited frequency table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3, and the similar short specific game flag is set. When it is on, the limited frequency table to be referenced is switched in the order of the limited frequency table 4 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3, and when the short specific game flag is on, the limited frequency table to be referenced is limited. Only the frequency table 4 is provided. Further, since the limited frequency table to be referred to is the same when the similar short specific game flag is on and when the short specific game flag is on, which specific game is the player (specific game) It will be difficult to determine how long will it last. This example is just an example, and in this example, the limited frequency table to be referred to first is the same when the similar short specific game flag is on and when the short specific game flag is on. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the table to be referenced is different, if the variation pattern (variation time) candidates to be selected and the selection rate are substantially the same, and the effect mode is also substantially the same. It is possible to configure so as to produce substantially the same effect as this example.

  Next, FIG. 37 is a limited frequency table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the third modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is that a limited frequency table 4 is provided, and the purpose thereof is during the short specific game and during the predetermined period of the similar short specific game (in this example, the 1-30th variation). By referring to the frequency table 4, it is difficult for the player to determine which specific gaming state is the short specific game or the similar short specific game, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 (Modification 3) in FIG. 16 in Modification 3 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 1655 (Modification 3) and Step 1657 (Modification 3), and the purpose is to make the number of times shorter depending on the main game symbol that triggers the special game. That is, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1654, in step 1655 (change 3), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the short specific game flag is set. It is determined whether or not it is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1655 (Variation 3), the process proceeds to Step 1656, and the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number A (80 times in this example) in the time reduction number counter MP52c. On the other hand, in the case of No (in the case of a short specific game), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times B (30 times in this example) to the hour / short number counter MP52c in Step 1657 (Variation 3). , Step 1658 follows.

  Next, FIG. 39 is an example of an effect content determination table in the third modification from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is that a “short specific game / similar short specific game effect content determination table” in the lower right part of FIG. That is, in the gaming machine according to the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol that becomes a short specific game or a similar short specific game is a big hit, the “short stage stage” (ST 1-30th variation) is produced. When deciding, the “short specific game / similar short specific game effect content determination table” that is not referred to during the long specific game is referred to. Thereafter, in the case of a short specific game, the time shortening game ends with 30 fluctuations, and thereafter the content of the effect is determined with reference to the normal effect content determination table. On the other hand, in the case of a similar short specific game, the time-reduced game continues up to 80 fluctuations after the big hit, so the same table as the long specific game is referred from the 31st fluctuation after the big hit.

  In this way, by constructing a common effect between the short specific game and the similar short specific game, the player's expectation is raised in terms of whether or not the time shortening game ends with 30 variations. This makes it possible to improve the fun of the game. Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited to this, such as the number of changes, the contents of the effects, the change mode, the table configuration, etc. For example, in the case of a short specific game, the time shortening game has ended (probability change / non- After entering the time-saving game state, the content of the effect may be determined with reference to an effect content determination table that is different between the normal time and the time-saving game. In addition, it is possible to increase the player's expectation by configuring so as to refer to a common effect content determination table (for example, a short specific game / similar short specific game effect content determination table in the figure) immediately after the end of all the big hits. It is possible to talk.

  By changing as described above, according to the modified example 3 from the present embodiment, the time period (the number of fluctuations) in the time-reduced gaming state after the special game is made different depending on the big hit symbol, and the time-reducing gaming state. When the period is short and when the period is short, the same variation mode determination table can be referred to. (Playing) is executed, and it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how long the running time-saving gaming state will last, and the entertainment of the game is enhanced by performing the production that depresses the player's expectation. Become.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, in the case of a similar short specific game, the variation mode and / or the variation mode not selected in the case of a short specific game are the same. May also be configured to have different production contents. In such a configuration, when the symbol variation (or effect) is executed in the variation mode selected only in the similar short specific game, the game is that the period of time-saving gaming state is relatively long. The person can be recognized (conversely, it may have a variation mode / effect content selected only in the short specific game).

(Modification 4 from this embodiment)
In the present embodiment, all the special games are configured as special games with a game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the special game in which the special winning opening is opened for a very short time can be executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to execute a new production that enhances the fun of the game. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a fourth modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, in the fourth modification from the present embodiment, the game progression means MP is a unit game that makes the big prize opening an advantageous state for the player for a predetermined period or a period until a predetermined number of balls are made. There is a small hit game control means MP40 for controlling the small hit that is executed only in the round. The small hit game control means MP40 further has a small hit game timer MP41t for managing the time during the small hit game.

  Next, FIG. 40 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. The change from this embodiment is Step 1750 (Variation 4), and its purpose is to perform processing related to execution of small hits. That is, after executing the special game control process in Step 1600, the main control board M executes the small hit game control process described later in Step 1750 (Modification 4), and proceeds to Step 1910.

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 9 in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1441 (Modification 4) and Step 1442 (Modification 4), the purpose of which is to execute the process related to the small hit symbol. That is, if the stop symbol is not a big hit symbol in step 1430, in step 1441 (odd 4), the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and It is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in Step 1441 (Modification 4), in Step 1442 (Modification 4), the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB, and proceeds to Step 1500. To do. On the other hand, also in the case of No in Step 1441 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 1500.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a table configuration diagram relating to the main game in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are that a small hit is provided and a 2R big hit is provided. In the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, the opening mode of the big prize opening relating to the small hit is substantially the same as the opening mode of the big winning opening relating to the 2R big hit, and the player can open the big winning opening. It is configured so that the small hit and 2R big hit cannot be discriminated by visually recognizing (in this example, although not particularly shown, the same effect can be executed for the small hit and 2R big hit. Preferred).

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1750 (Modification 4) of FIG. 40 in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. First, at step 1752, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1754, the process proceeds to step 1762. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1754, in step 1756, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the release pattern (0.2 second release → 1.0 second closure → 0.2 second release →) to the small hit game timer MP41t → The opening time of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) based on the closing) is set. Next, at step 1758, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the big prize opening and starts the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, at step 1760, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step 1761, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit start display instruction command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (sub control command transmission processing in step 1930 performs sub And the process proceeds to Step 1762.

  Next, in step 1762, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the game state temporary storage means MB and determines whether or not there is a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls. If Yes in step 1762, the process proceeds to step 1766. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1762, in step 1764, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t to determine whether or not a predetermined time for opening the big prize opening has elapsed. If Yes in step 1764, the process proceeds to step 1766. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1764, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, at step 1766, the small hit game control means MP40 stops driving the first electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 or the second electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20 to perform the first. Close the big prize opening C10 or the second big prize opening C20. Next, at step 1768, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, at step 1770, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step “1772, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the gaming state temporary storage means MB. Next, in step 1774, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the small hit end display instruction command in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub main control unit SM (by the control command transmission processing in step 1930). Is transmitted to the main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910). Even in the case of No in step 1752, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of Step 2400 of FIG. 18 in Modification 4 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2440 (Modification 4) to Step 2476 (Modification 4), and the purpose is to execute the probability variation reset failure production and the probability variation reset success production. That is, in Step 2440 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and refers to whether or not the specific game running flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2440 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2404. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2440 (odd 4), in step 2442 (odd 4), the background effect display control means SM23 indicates that the stopped main game symbol is a short open big hit symbol (in this example, 3A / 3B) It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in Step 2442 (Modification 4), in Step 2444 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the stopped main game symbol is not a small hit symbol. In the case of Yes in Step 2444 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2404. On the other hand, if No in Step 2444 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2446 (Modification 4).

  Next, in Step 2446 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the probability change reset failure effect execution flag is off. judge. In the case of Yes in Step 2446 (Modification 4), in Step 2448 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a small hitting start display instruction command has been received from the main side. If Yes in Step 2448 (Variable 4), in Step 2450 (Variable 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the probability change re-set failure effect executing flag. Turn on. Next, in step 2452 (odd 4), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the probability change re-set failure effect (the effect of notifying that the number of probability changes remains as it is) (display in step 2900). In the command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to Step 2454 (Modification 4). In addition, also when No is obtained in Step 2446 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2454 (Modification 4).

  Next, in Step 2454 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a small hit end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in Step 2454 (Variation 4), in Step 2456 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the small hit end display (sub-sub control in the display command transmission control processing of Step 2900) Part SS). Next, in step 2458 (odd 4), the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the probability change reset failure effect executing flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2900. It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900) also in the case of No in Step 2448 (Modification 4) or Step 2454 (Modification 4).

  As described above, the processing from Step 2446 (Modification 4) to Step 2458 (Modification 4) is the processing at the time of execution of the probability variation re-set failure effect at the time of the small hit symbol stop, and in the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, When a small win is won during a specific game, a probability change re-set failure effect is executed.

  Further, if No in Step 2442 (Modified 4), in Step 2460 (Modified 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and executes the certain change re-set success effect. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 2460 (Modification 4), in Step 2462 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2462 (variant 4), in step 2464 (variant 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the probability change re-set successful effect executing flag. Turn on. Next, in Step 2466 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the current effect stage is the short effect stage. In the case of Yes in Step 2466 (Variation 4), in Step 2468 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is a probability change re-set success effect A (effect that only informs that the remaining probability change count is reset). Is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2472 (transition 4). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2466 (Modification 4), in other words, if the current effect stage is a long effect stage or a fixed effect stage, in Step 2470 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 is surely changed. A command for displaying the set success effect B (an effect congratulating that the remaining probability variation number is reset) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2900), and step The procedure shifts to 2472 (Variation 4). In addition, also when No is determined in Step 2460 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to Step 2472 (Modification 4).

  In addition, in the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, in the short performance stage, the remaining number of probable changes (the number of changes in which the main game symbol is guaranteed to fluctuate in the probability variation game state) remains large. Even if the number of probability changes is reset, the player's profit is not so much (for example, the remaining number of times of probability change is 75 → 80 and only increases 5 times), so that only the notification that the number of remaining probability changes will be reset Will be executed. In the long performance stage and the fixed performance stage, the remaining probability variation number (the variation number in which the main game symbol is guaranteed to vary in the probability variation game state) is reduced, and the probability variation number is reset. If this is done, it will be highly profitable for the player (for example, the remaining probability variation number will increase from 5 to 80 times and increase by 75 times), so that an effect congratulating that the remaining probability variation number will be reset will be executed. .

  Next, in Step 2472 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command is received from the main side. In the case of Yes in Step 2472 (Modification 4), in Step 2474 (Modification 4), the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to the jackpot end display (in the display command transmission control processing of Step 2900, the sub-sub control section Sent to the SS side). Next, in Step 2476 (Variation 4), the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the probability change resetting success effect executing flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and performs the next processing ( The process proceeds to step 2900. It should be noted that also in the case of No in Step 2462 (Modification 4) or Step 2472 (Modification 4), the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900).

  As described above, the processing from Step 2460 (Modification 4) to Step 2476 (Modification 4) is the processing at the time of execution of the probabilistic re-setting success effect at the time of the short open big hit symbol stop, and in the fourth modification from the present embodiment When the short stage is won for the short opening big hit, the probability change reset success production A is executed, and when the long stage or the fixed stage is won for the short opening big hit, the probability change reset success production B is executed. It is configured to be.

  Here, the upper part of the figure is an image of the probability variation re-set effect. As shown in the figure, in the fourth modification from the present embodiment, when a small win is won during a specific game, a probabilistic re-set failure effect is executed, and a short opening big win is won in the short stage Probability re-set success production A is executed, and when the long production stage or the fixed production stage is won with a short open big hit, the probability variation reset success production B is executed. An effect according to the player's profit mode is executed.

  By changing as described above, in the fourth modification from the present embodiment, a small hit that does not switch the gaming state related to the winning probability of the main game and / or the auxiliary game, and the winning of the main game and / or the auxiliary game By providing a short opening big hit (2R big hit in this example) that can switch the gaming state related to the probability, and making the opening form of the big winning opening substantially the same (the production contents are also substantially the same), the player can Since it is not possible to discriminate between a small hit and a short open big hit from the opening pattern, it is possible to execute an effective performance that suggests whether or not the gaming state has changed (whether it was a big hit or a big hit). Will attract interest and increase the fun of the game.

(Modification 5 from this embodiment)
Further, in the present embodiment, when a certain stay stage (for example, “short effect stage”) is completed, it is configured to move to the next stay stage (for example, “long effect stage”). For a player who first plays a gaming machine that executes an effect, the effect mode is suddenly changed, which may be mistaken for a change in the game state or a prefetch effect. Therefore, the configuration for solving such a problem is a fifth modification from the present embodiment, and only the changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 10 in Modification 5 from the present embodiment. The changes from this embodiment are about Step 1453 (Modification 5), Step 1455 (Modification 5), Step 1457 (Modification 5) and Step 1459 (Modification 5), and the purpose thereof is the final change ( In the first stage and the final stage 2), a dedicated limited frequency table is referred to. That is, if the limited frequency counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1453 (variable 5), It is determined whether or not the counter value G is not the first stage final variation value (G = 51). In the case of Yes in Step 1453 (Variation 5), the process proceeds to Step 1454. On the other hand, if No in Step 1453 (Variable 5), in Step 1455 (Variable 5), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the stage switching table 1 and the main game side Based on the random number and the winning / losing lottery result, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  If the limited frequency counter value G is within the second stage range (80 ≧ G> 50), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c in step 1457 (variable 5), It is determined whether or not the counter value G is not the second stage final variation value (G = 11). In the case of Yes in Step 1457 (Variant 5), the process proceeds to Step 1458. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1457 (Variable 5), in Step 1459 (Variable 5), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the stage switching table 2 and the main game side Based on the random number and the winning / losing lottery result, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1413).

  Next, FIG. 46 is a table configuration diagram related to the limited frequency in the fifth modification from the present embodiment. A change from the present embodiment is that a stage switching table 1 and a stage switching table 2 are provided. With this configuration, the stage change table is referred to in the final variation of the production stage 1 and the final variation of the production stage 2, so that a dedicated variation mode is selected at the time of loss. . In addition, the content of the table is the same as the limited frequency table when hitting.

  Next, FIG. 47 is an effect content determination table in Modification 5 from the present embodiment. The change from the present embodiment is that the stage transition effect is executed in the variation related to the loss referred to by the stage switching table. It should be noted that at the time of hitting, the same contents of effects are provided for the fluctuations referenced to the stage switching table and the fluctuations not referenced.

  By changing as described above, in the fifth modification from the present embodiment, when switching from the staying stage to the next stage, in the final variation of the staying stage, the stage A special effect (effect suggesting that the stage is switched) can be executed at the time of switching, and the effect is performed by referring to a dedicated table (stage switching table) at the time of execution when the effect is executed. It is configured to ensure variable time. In addition, in the final variation of the production stage, a dedicated variation mode is selected only at the time of a loss, and a normal winning production in the stay stage is executed at the time of winning. As a result, for a player who sees the production for the first time, it is easy to understand the change of the production, and for a player who is familiar with the production, the result of the final change at which the production stage is switched can predict the success / failure result, The fun of gaming will increase. This example is merely an example. For example, by using the fact that the final variation of the production stage becomes a dedicated variation pattern, even when the final variation of the production stage is a big hit, the production is almost the same as the stage switching production. May be configured such that an effect that is a big hit can be executed after (or during) the effect.

(Modification 6 from this embodiment)
Further, in the present embodiment, after the special game is finished, it is configured to make a transition to the probability variation / time shortening gaming state, but this is not restrictive. Good. In addition, in such a configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that improves the fun of the game by concealing whether or not the game has shifted to the probability variation game state after the special game is over. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a sixth modification from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of limited frequency variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 of FIG. 10 in Modification 6 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are step 1470 (variant 6), step 1472 (variant 6), and step 1474 (variant 6), the purpose of which is configured to change the limited frequency table to be referenced based on the threshold value. It is to be. That is, in step 1470 (variant 6), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 sets the threshold value S (for example, 7A · 7B: threshold value S = 50, 4A · 4B · 5A · 5B: Threshold value S = 60) is confirmed. Here, the threshold value S is a value representing the number of times the specific game is switched from the first stage to the second stage.

  Next, in Step 1472 (Variation 6), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and whether or not the counter value is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> threshold S). Determine. If YES in step 1472 (transformation 6), the flow advances to step 1454. On the other hand, if No in Step 1472 (Variation 6), in Step 1474 (Variation 6), the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c, and the counter value is within the second stage range (threshold S). It is determined whether ≧ G> 10). If Yes in Step 1474 (Variation 6), the process proceeds to Step 1458, and if No, the process proceeds to Step 1460.

  Here, the image on the same figure is an image for determining the variation mode. As shown in the figure, since the initial value of the limited frequency counter is 80, when the threshold S is 50, the first stage is 30 fluctuations, and when the threshold S is 60, the first stage is 20 fluctuations. It is configured to terminate.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1650 in FIG. 16 in Modification 6 from the present embodiment. The changes from the present embodiment are Step 1670 (Modification 6) to Step 1676 (Modification 6), and the purpose is to set different thresholds depending on the stop symbol of the executed special game. That is, in Step 1670 (Variation 6), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the executed special game stop symbol is the probability change notification jackpot symbol (7A, 7B). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in Step 1670 (Variation 6), in Step 1672 (Variation 6), the specific game control means MP50 recognizes that the probability change notification value (probability variation game state by the change timing of the step) as the step change threshold. This is a value for setting the timing. For example, 50) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1652. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1670 (Modified 6), in Step 1674 (Modified 6), the specific game control means MP50 is a probability variation threshold value as a step switching threshold value (whether or not it is a probability variation gaming state depending on the step switching timing) Is a value for setting a timing at which it is difficult to discriminate. For example, 60) is set. Next, in Step 1676 (Variation 6), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether the special game stop symbol that was executed was the non-probability variable big hit symbol (4A / 4B) Determine whether or not. If Yes in Step 1676 (Variation 6), the process proceeds to Step 1656. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1676 (transformation 6), in other words, if the stop symbol of the executed special game is the probability variation non-notification jackpot symbol (5A / 5B), the process proceeds to step 1652.

  By changing as described above, in the modified example 6 from the present embodiment, whether to shift to the probability variation gaming state (in this example, the so-called ST with variation frequency limitation) after the special game, depending on the jackpot symbol And determining whether or not the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the probability variation gaming state have different durations of the “short effect stage” (in the case of probability variation, a mode in which the duration is long can be selected) Depending on the period during which the “short performance stage” continues, the degree of expectation in the probability variation gaming state is high. As a result, in the non-stochastic variation gaming state, the period of staying in the “short production stage” ends with 20 variations, so the player has a sense of expectation that the “short production stage” will continue. It is possible to improve the fun of the game. Further, in combination with the configuration of the fifth modification from the present embodiment (stage switching effect), a dedicated scoring effect may be executed at the 20th variation of the “short effect stage”. In addition, in this example, even in the probability variation game state, a big hit (the number of special games round and production is the same as the non-probable change big hit and difficult to discriminate) that the “short stage” ends with 20 fluctuations. Even if the “short stage stage” ends with 20 fluctuations, it is possible to play with a sense of expectation until the end of the specific game.

  In addition, this example is only an example, and is not limited to this. For example, in combination with the configuration of the modified example 3 (the number of times shortened varies depending on the jackpot symbol), the non-stochastic variation gaming state or the probability variation gaming state / time reduction number -It is also possible to provide a gaming machine having a variety of profit expectation variations of a large number of players by combining the number of special game rounds and the like. In such a configuration, since there are a plurality of contents and periods of a specific game, an effect that suggests the contents and period improves the interest of the game more effectively (for example, if the number of times is different) By doing so, it is possible to produce an effect as if there are a plurality of ST times).

  Further, in Modification 6 from this embodiment, two limited frequency table reference patterns are provided, one of which is selected only in the probability variation gaming state, and the other is in the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more limited frequency table reference patterns may be provided. In addition, a plurality of limited frequency table reference patterns that are selected in both the probability variation gaming state and the non-stochastic variation gaming state are provided, and the proportion of probability variation gaming states (the jackpot symbol that shifts to the probability variation gaming state occupies You may comprise so that a selection rate may differ.

(Modification 7 from this embodiment)
In addition, although not particularly illustrated in the present example, if there is a big hit (especially a hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, a special effect is executed to hold the big hit. It is possible to produce the jackpot related to in a novel way. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a modified example 7 from the present embodiment, and only changes from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1600 in FIG. 5 in Modification 7 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 1636 (Modified 7) to Step 1800 (Modified 7), the purpose of which is to execute an end demo. That is, when the final round of the special game is ended, in Step 1636 (Variation 7), the special game control means MP30 turns on the end demonstration execution permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Then, the process proceeds to Step 1638 (Variation 7). Next, in Step 1638 (Variation 7), the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the end demonstration execution permission flag is ON. In the case of Yes in Step 1638 (Variation 7), in step 1800 (Variation 7), the special game control means MP30 executes an end demo time control process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 1910). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910) also in the case of No in step 1638 (change 7).

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of an end demo time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1800 (Modification 7) in FIG. 50 in Modification 7 from the present embodiment. First, in step 1802, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether or not the end demo execution flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1802, in Step 1804, the special game control means MP30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and whether or not the stop symbol is the long demo time big hit symbol (7A, 7B). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in Step 1804, in Step 1806, the special game control means MP30 starts by setting a long time (for example, 10 seconds) in the end demo time timer, and proceeds to Step 1810. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1804, in other words, when the stop symbol is a short demo time big hit symbol (3A, 3B, 5A, 5B), in step 1808, the special game control means MP30 shortens to the end demo time timer. Start by setting a time (for example, 3 seconds), and proceed to Step 1810. Next, in step 1810, the special game control means MP30 sets a special game end display instruction command to the sub side and a command related to the determined end demo time information (by the control command transmission process of step 1930, the sub main control unit SM). Sent to the side). Next, in step 1812, the special game control means MP30 turns on the end demonstration execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1814. In the case of No in step 1802, the process proceeds to step 1814.

  Next, in step 1814, the special game control means MP30 refers to the end demonstration time timer and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in Step 1814, in Step 1816, the special game control means MP30 turns off the end demonstration execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1818, the special game control means MP30 turns off the end demonstration execution permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1820, the special game control means MP30 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1650, the special game control means MP30 executes the above-described gaming state determination process after the end of the special game, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1910).

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the special game related display control processing according to the subroutine of Step 2400 in FIG. 18 in Modification 7 from the present embodiment. Changes from the present embodiment are Step 2480 (Modification 7) to Step 2600 (Modification 7), and the purpose is to execute the end demonstration effect and the end demonstration extension effect. That is, after turning off the special game, in Step 2480 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and the end demonstration time is long (10 Second). In the case of Yes in Step 2480 (Variation 7), in Step 2482 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts with a long time (10 seconds) set in the demonstration time display timer, and starts in Step 2486 (Variation 7). Move to 7). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 2480 (Variation 7), in Step 2484 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts by setting a short time (3 seconds) in the demonstration time display timer, and Step 2486 Move to (Variation 7).

  Next, in Step 2486 (Variant 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets a command for displaying an end demo image (for example, an image for informing the number of game balls acquired, the number of consecutive games, etc.) (Step 2900). Are transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side). Next, in Step 2488 (Modification 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n turns on the end demonstration display flag, and proceeds to Step 2490 (Modification 7). Note that if the answer is No in step 2404 or step 2414, the process proceeds to step 2490 (change 7).

  Next, in Step 2490 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the end demonstration display flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 2490 (variant 7), in step 2492 (variant 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the demo time display timer and determines whether or not the demo time display timer value is 0. To do. If Yes in Step 2492 (Variation 7), in Step 2600 (Variation 7), the background effect display content determination means SM23n executes an end demonstration extended effect execution process to be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900). Transition. Note that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2900) also in the case of No in Step 2490 (Modified 7) or Step 2492 (Modified 7).

  Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of an end demo extension effect execution process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 (Modification 7) in FIG. 52 in Modification Example 7 from the present embodiment. First, in step 2602, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the end demonstration extension flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 pre-determines the hold result and change time of each hold based on hold information (win / lot lottery random number / variation mode determination random number). Next, in step 2606, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether there is a big hit hold in the main game hold.

  In the case of Yes in step 2606, in step 2608, the background effect display content determination means SM23n determines the total value Ta (the earliest jackpot as the earliest jackpot) of the hold until the hold which becomes the earliest jackpot of the hold determined in advance. The sum of the fluctuation time of the hold and the change time of the hold that is digested before the first big hit is set in the demonstration time extension display timer. Next, in step 2610, the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts the demonstration time extension display timer by subtracting the display time (1 second) of the jackpot notification image from the demonstration time extension display timer value Ta (demo time). Subtracted to provide time to display the jackpot notification image at the end of the extended performance). Next, in step 2612, the background effect display content determination means SM23n turns on the jackpot notification flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2618.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2606, in step 2614, the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets the total value Tb of the variation time related to the hold determined in advance in the demonstration time extension display timer. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display content determination means SM23n starts a demonstration time extension display timer, and proceeds to step 2618.

  Next, in step 2618, the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets a command for displaying the same image as the end demo image on the front layer (in the display command transmission control process of step 2900, the sub-sub control unit SS side). To be sent). With this processing, the player thinks as if the end demo is continuously displayed.

  Here, the image on the right side of the figure is a display control image. As shown in the figure, other effects such as symbol variation are executed in the rear layer, and the front layer is provided so as to overlap the front side (viewed by the player) of the rear layer. Since the end demo image is displayed in the front layer, other effects such as symbol variation are not displayed. Although not particularly shown in the present example, it is desirable that the audio be configured in accordance with the image (moving image) displayed on the front layer.

  Next, in step 2620, the background effect display content determining means SM23n turns on the end demonstration extension flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2622. Note that if the result is No in Step 2602, the process proceeds to Step 2622.

  Next, in step 2622, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the demonstration time extension display timer and determines whether or not the demonstration time extension timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display content determination means SM23n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the big hit notification flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2624, in step 2626, the background effect display content determination means SM23n sets a command for displaying the jackpot notification image on the front layer for a predetermined time (the display time of the jackpot notification image subtracted from the timer value in step 2610). (Sent to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2900), and the process proceeds to step 2628. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2624, the process proceeds to step 2628.

  Next, in step 2628, the background effect display content determination means SM23n turns off the big hit notification flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. Next, in step 2630, the background effect display content determination unit SM23n turns off the end demonstration extended flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage unit SM23b. Next, in step 2632, the background effect display content determination unit SM23n turns off the end demonstration display flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage unit SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2900). Transition. Even in the case of No in step 2622, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2900).

  By changing as described above, in Modification Example 7 from the present embodiment, at the end of the special game, the end demo effect that notifies the result of the special game or the like can be executed, and after the demonstration effect ends. (After the special game ends), the specified period after the start of the change of the main game (special game) By displaying the same effect as the demonstration effect (e.g., continuously displaying an image notifying the result of the special game even during the main game symbol change) When there is a big hit hold in the hold, it is configured so that an image substantially the same as the demonstration effect is displayed until immediately before the symbol stop (= big hit) related to the big hit hold. After the end of the special game, it becomes a novel effect that suddenly becomes the next big hit without recognizing the fluctuation during the specific game, and the special game is re-started, improving the fun of the game It becomes possible. In addition, by making the execution time of the end demonstration effect different depending on the main game symbol won in the big hit, it is possible to give the player the end demonstration effect and the effect of changing the main game symbol that performs the same effect as the end demonstration effect. Therefore, it is difficult to distinguish and the interest of the game will increase.

(Second Embodiment)
In the present embodiment, after the special game ends, the game is always shifted to the probability variation gaming state with the number of times limited, and the effect of the game is increased by gradually changing the production of the period in the probability variation gaming state. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the player's expectation cannot be expressed in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability-variable gaming state depending on the jackpot symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is a second embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment has a specific area C22 in which a game ball can enter in the second grand prize opening C20. The game progression means MP further includes a distribution game execution control means MP36 for executing a distribution game for opening the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} of FIG. 9 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1408 (second) and step 1412-2 (second), and the purpose is to change the variation mode in the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state. This is different from that shown in the present embodiment. That is, after determining the stop symbol of the main game symbol in Step 1410-2, in Step 1408 (second), the game content determination means MN refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game It is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1412, and the variation mode determination means MN50 determines the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-. B) The main game table 3-1 is referred to, and the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game side random number / win / lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1408 (second), the process proceeds to step 1411, and the game content determination means MN refers to the limited frequency counter MN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1411, that is, in the case of a non-probability variation / time-reduced gaming state, in step 1412-2 (second), the variation mode determination means MN50 determines the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-. The main game table 3-2 in A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) is referred to, and the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined based on the main game side random number / winning lottery result. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1411, the same processing as in this embodiment is executed in the processing of steps 1450 and 1413.

  FIG. 55 is a main game table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that the combination of main game symbols that are big hits is different, and a table that is referred to in the non-probability variation game state and the time reduction game state is provided. Of the main game symbols that are big hits, the main game symbols for which a special game that makes it easy for a game ball to enter a specific area is “5A, 7A, 3B, 5B, and 7B”. The main game symbol in which a special game that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the area is executed is “2A”.

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of special game control processing according to the subroutine of step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1611 (second) and step 1850 (second), and the purpose thereof is a distribution game (unit game that opens the second big prize opening C20 having a specific area). ) Can be executed. That is, in step 1611 (second), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the currently executed round is a distributed game execution round (second R, 4R in this example). In the case of Yes in step 1611 (second), in step 1850 (second), the allocated game execution control means MP36 executes an allocated game execution process described later, and proceeds to step 1634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1611 (second), the process proceeds to step 1612 and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  Next, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second) in FIG. 56 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1852, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the distribution game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1852, the process moves to step 1866. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1852, in Step 1854, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the stopped main game symbol is a long open symbol (3B / 5A. 5B · 7A · 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1854, in Step 1856, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses a long release pattern (for example, a 15-second release pattern) as the release pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an opening pattern designed so as to definitely enter the specific area C22 is set, and the process proceeds to step 1860. In the case of No in step 1854, in step 1858, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses the short open pattern (for example, 0. 0) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. The opening pattern is set for 1 second and is designed so that non-entry into the specific area C22 becomes definite, and the process proceeds to Step 1860.

  Next, at step 1860, the allocated game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1862, the distributed game execution control means MP36 turns on the distributed game continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1864, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set opening pattern, and proceeds to step 1866.

  Next, at step 1866, the distribution game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1866, the process proceeds to step 1870. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1866, in step 1868, the allocation game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second big winning opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1868, the process proceeds to step 1870. Next, at step 1870, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, at step 1872, the assigned game execution control means MP36 turns off the assigned game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, at step 1874, the allocated game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the allocated game execution round. In the case of Yes in Step 1874, in Step 1876, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to Step 1878. . Also in the case of No in step 1874, the process proceeds to step 1878. Next, at step 1878, the assigned game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the assigned game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1634). Even in the case of No in step 1868, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1634).

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the special game according to the subroutine of step 1650 of FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. First, the difference from this embodiment is about step 1680 (second), step 1682 (second), step 1684 (second), and step 1686 (second), and the object is the second embodiment. In the sorting game executed at, whether or not the player enters the specific area C22 is different from the possibility of transition to the probability varying gaming state and the upper limit of the number of times of variation in the time-saving gaming state. That is, at the time of execution of this subroutine, in step 1680 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1680 (second), in step 1682 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. . Next, in step 1652 and step 1654, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 80 times) in the probability variation number counter MP51c and turns on the main game probability variation flag. Next, in step 1684 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter MN52c. Next, in step 1656, the specific game control means MP50 sets the predetermined number A (80 times in this example) to the time-count counter MP52c and proceeds to step 1658, and thereafter in steps 1658 and 1660. The same processing as in this embodiment is executed.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1680 (second), in step 1686 (second), the specific game control means MP50 has a predetermined number of times B (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c. It is not limited, and a value equal to or less than the predetermined number A is suitable), and the process proceeds to step 1658.

  Here, in the second embodiment, when a game ball enters the specific area C22 during a special game, the number of times of change that results in a time-reduced game state after the special game is the probability-variable game state. The predetermined number of times A (80 in this example) is the same as the number of fluctuations, and if there is no game ball entering the specific area during the special game, the number of fluctuations that will result in a time-reduced game state after the special game is predetermined. The number of times A is configured to be a predetermined number B (50 times in this example), which is a number that is different (small). In addition, the variation mode of the main game symbol during the time-reduced gaming state is such that a three-stage limited frequency table (limited frequency table 1, limited frequency table 2 and limited frequency table 3) is used for a predetermined number A of time-reduced gaming states. The main game table 3-2 is referred to in the time-reduced game state of the predetermined number of times B, and the contents of the effect are also referred to. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the upper limit number of time-saving games may be determined based on the symbol at the time of big hit (for example, during special games) If the player has not entered the specific area C22, the upper limit number of fluctuations in the time-saving game is determined by the big hit symbol, etc.).

  Next, FIG. 59 is an example of an effect content determination table in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that it has an effect content determination table that is referenced in the non-probability variation gaming state and the time reduction gaming state shown in the lower right part of the same figure. In the second embodiment, if a game ball does not enter the specific area C22 during a special game, the game state after the special game is not a probability variation game state, but a non-probability variation / time shortening game state (50 variations). ) In such a case, the contents of the effect are determined with reference to the table. In addition, this example is an example to the last, and is not limited to this, such as the frequency | count of a fluctuation | variation, the content of production, a fluctuation | variation aspect, the structure of a table.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game is determined depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game (specific area) In the case of a game machine (so-called tamagyo type game machine) that does not enter the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball and does not transition to the probability variation gaming state without entering the ball, By changing the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening game state from the variation mode (and production) in the probability variation game state, an appropriate production according to the player's profit mode is executed. It can be done. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  In the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening is in an open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. A second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with low expectation for transition to the probability variation is finished, the probability There is a possibility that the opening operation of the second time with high expectation to the change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or longer than one game ball launch interval in order to ensure that a player enters a specific area, and is (half the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of balls), and it is particularly preferable to be equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of game balls).

(1) << Characteristic configuration in this embodiment >>
(1-1) Board Surface Configuration (1-1-1) Game Area In this example, the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which game balls flow down mainly on the left side of the board surface) Even if it is fired at a second firing strength that is stronger than the firing strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the board surface), the game ball easily flows down to the center of the board surface. Is also configured to allow entry.

(1-1-2) Electric Power In this example, the second firing strength is higher than the first firing strength in comparison with the first firing strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball mainly flows down to the left side of the board surface). A main game start port (second main game start port) with an electric accessory is placed on a path that can flow when fired at a launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the board) doing.

(1-1-3) Main Game Start Port In this example, the first main game start port is disposed in the approximate center of the game area, and the second main game start port is disposed on the right side of the game area. And (1) When the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball mainly flows down to the left side of the board surface) is launched, it is easy to enter the first main game start port, while the second main game It is difficult to enter the starting port. (2) When the second launch strength is greater than the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball flows down to the right side of the board surface), The first main game start port and the second main game start port are arranged so that it is easy to enter the game start port but difficult to enter the first main game start port.

(1-1-4) Grand Prize Winning Port (1-1-4-1) Position Two big winning holes are arranged side by side on the approximate center with respect to the center (vertical direction) of the board surface.

(1-1-5) Display Device Although not particularly shown in this example, the jackpot symbol displayed on the main game symbol display device is large in the special game related to the jackpot symbol even if the player visually recognizes it. It is comprised so that it may become difficult to recognize the opening aspect of a winning opening.

(1-2) Control (1-2-1) Main side control (1-2-1-1) Launcher In this example, the launcher has a launcher capable of adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball by the player's operation. The launching device has a game ball firing interval (launch rate per shot when continuously launched) of 600 ms (100 game balls fired per minute). The launching device is not the main side control but the prize ball paying side control.

(1-2-1-2) When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on In this example, the power supply to the RAM is continued by the backup power supply even when the power is cut off, so that the information at the time of the power interruption can be maintained. ing.

(1-2-1-3) Special Game In this example, the special game release pattern is determined based on the main game symbol that triggered the special game.

(1-2-1-4) Specific Game In this example, the probability variation gaming state is configured to end when a predetermined number of main game symbol variations have been made.

  In this example, after the special game is over, the game is in a time-saving game state until a predetermined number of main game symbol changes are made. As a result, the winning probability on the auxiliary game side is improved, the fluctuation time of the main game symbol / auxiliary game symbol is relatively shortened, and further, the main game start port (second main game start) when the auxiliary game is won The opening time of the electric accessory placed in the mouth) is configured to be relatively longer than that in the normal gaming state. In the example, the release mode B) is configured to be selected only in the normal gaming state.

(1-2-1-5) Limited Frequency In this example, the table that refers to the variation mode of the main game symbol in the probability variation gaming state has three stages (limited frequency table 1 → limited frequency table 2 → limited frequency table 3). In this order) (so-called three-stage ST).

  In this example, the variation mode determination table to be referred to can be changed depending on the number of reservations in any one of the three stages ST (in this example, the first stage and the third stage). In other stages (second stage in this example), the variation mode determination table to be referred to is not changed depending on the number of holdings. In all stages, when the result of lottery determination and the number of reserved balls are the same, the contents of the tables referred to on the first main game side and the second main game side are the same.

  In this example, when there are fluctuations related to the loss of the main game symbol and there are two or three holding balls, the fluctuation time (3 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three-stage ST and the third stage is the most. In the fluctuation time (5 seconds) that is easy to select, the third stage has a longer fluctuation time. On the other hand, in the case of fluctuations related to the big hit of the main game symbol and two or three holding balls, the fluctuation time (10 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three stage ST and the most selected in the third stage In the easy fluctuation time (5 seconds), the second stage has a longer fluctuation time.

(1-2-1-6) Auxiliary game In this example, when the auxiliary game stop symbol is hit and the electric accessory is released, the release mode that is opened for the longest time in one release (in this example, the release) Aspect B) can only be selected during the normal gaming state.

(1-2-2) Sub-main side control

(1-2-2-1) Pre-reading effect In this example, it is comprised so that a pre-reading effect can be performed only in the predetermined period (31st-80th change) in a specific game.

In this example, when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations straddles the effect stage, the pre-reading effect is not executed.
(1-2-2-2) Other effects

  In this example, if a hold on the second main game side occurs during a normal game state (non-stochastic game state and non-time-reduced game state), a specific game is being played when the second main game side is on hold. The effect content is determined using the effect content determination table similar to (especially the 31st to 70th changes).

  In this example, the effect of each change in a predetermined period (71st to 80th changes) during a specific game is configured to execute an effect for notifying the result of the success after executing a common effect regardless of the result of the success / failure. ing.

  In this example, based on the number of consecutive jackpots (not counted in the first hit), the effect displayed during the jackpot execution is a special effect, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is being opened for the longest time. When the big hit is due to the suspension generated by the entry, even if the big hit is the first hit, it is counted as the number of consecutive resorts.

(2) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 1 from the Present Embodiment >>

(2-1) Pre-reading effect In the first modification from the present embodiment, the pre-reading effect can be executed even when the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations crosses the end (or switching) of the stay stage. Has been. Also, each period {e.g., three periods of "short effect stage" (1st to 30th change), "long effect stage" (31st to 70th change), and "fixed effect stage" (71st to 80th change)} The frequency of occurrence of the pre-reading effect is different depending on.

  In addition, when a pre-reading effect occurs across the end (or switching) of the stay stage, the big hit expectation degree related to the pre-reading effect is higher than the case where the end of the predetermined period is not crossed. Has been.

  Moreover, when the stay stage is completed (or switched) during the execution of the pre-reading effects over a plurality of variations, the pre-reading effects can be interrupted.

(3) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 2 from this Embodiment >>
(3-1) Limited Frequency In Modification 2 from the present embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain effect mode, and which effect content table is to be determined with reference to which effect content table during special games. The player can be arbitrarily selected by operating the sub input button.

(3-2) At the time of power failure recovery In the second modification from the present embodiment, at the time of power failure recovery, a certain mode is set as the default effect mode.

(3-3) Sub input button In the second modification from the present embodiment, the player is a member that can be operated, and a sub input button capable of transmitting operation input information to the sub main control unit is provided. Yes.

(4) << Characteristic Configuration in Modification 3 from the Present Embodiment >>

(4-1) Control (4-1-1) Main side control (4-1-1-1) Specific game In the modified example 3 from this embodiment, when a special game is won during a normal game, Assuming that the number of changes of the main game symbol that becomes a probability-variable game state after execution of the special game is a predetermined number A (80 in this example), the change of the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after execution of the special game There are a predetermined number A (80 times in this example) and a predetermined number B (30 times in this example).

(4-1-1-2) Limited Frequency In the third modification from the present embodiment, the number of changes in the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after the execution of the special game is the predetermined number A (in this example, 80 (In particular, the specific game related to the long specific game symbol), the three-stage ST is configured to refer to the table in the order of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3, When the number of changes of the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after execution of the special game is the predetermined number B (30 times in this example) (specific game related to the short specific game symbol), the limited frequency table 1 The limited frequency table 4 is referred to without reference.

  In addition, in the case where the number of changes of the main game symbol that becomes a time-reduced game after execution of the special game is the predetermined number A (80 in this example) (particularly, a specific game related to a similar short specific game symbol) The three-stage ST is configured to refer to the limited frequency table 4 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3 in this order, and in the first stage, the main game symbol that becomes a time-saving game after the execution of the special game The same limited frequency table 4 is referred to when the number of fluctuations is the predetermined number B (in this example, 30 times) (a specific game related to the short specific game symbol).

  In the specific game related to the short specific game design, after referring to the limited frequency table 4 different from the limited frequency table 1 referred to in the first stage of the specific game related to the long specific game design, the long specific game design is displayed. The main game table 3 different from the limited frequency table 2 referred to in the second stage of the specific game is referred to.

  In the third modified example from the present embodiment, when the short specific game symbol is won in the normal game, the number of times the main game symbol is changed to a time-reduced game after the special game is a predetermined number B (30 in this example). The limited frequency table 4 is a table related to the variation mode determination to be referred to. On the other hand, when the short specific game symbol is won during the specific game (in the probability variation game state or in the time shortening game state), the number of times of change of the main game symbol that becomes the time reduction game after the special game is the predetermined number of times A ( In this example, it is 80 times), and the table for determining the variation mode to be referred to is the three-stage ST of the limited frequency table 1 → the limited frequency table 2 → the limited frequency table 3.

(5) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 4 from this embodiment >>

(5-1) Special Game In Modification 4 from the present embodiment, the special game release pattern is determined based on the main game symbol that triggered the special game. In addition, the opening pattern of the special game consisting of a predetermined number of unit games (2R in this example) and the opening pattern of the small hit game are configured to be substantially the same opening pattern. With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the special game or the small win is won by looking at the opening pattern of the big winning opening.

(5-2) Specific Game In the fourth modification from the present embodiment, when the small hit symbol is won at the time of the specific game, an effect that notifies that the remaining number of fluctuations of the probability fluctuation is maintained is executed. . In addition, if a short open big hit symbol is won at the time of a specific game, an effect that informs that the remaining number of fluctuations of probability fluctuation is reset is executed, so that it can be an effect mode that differs depending on the number of remaining fluctuations of the current probability fluctuation. It is configured.

(5-3) Limited frequency In the modified example 4 from the present embodiment, a short open big hit (4A, 4B, which is a 2R special game) and a small win are provided, and the open mode is substantially the same. Yes. In addition, when the short opening big hit is won during the three stage ST, after the short opening big hit, the first stage table of the three stage ST (in this example, the limited frequency table 1) is referred to (in the limited frequency counter). On the other hand, when winning a small hit during the three-stage ST, the limited frequency table referred to at the time of winning the small hit is continuously referred to (the limited frequency counter value is maintained). (However, if the variation won in the small hit is the final variation of the limited frequency table that is referenced, the limited frequency table corresponding to the next stage is referred after the small hit).

(5-4) Production during specific game In the fourth modification from the present embodiment, when winning a small hit during a specific game, the probability variation re-set failure production is performed as the probability variation re-set failure production (in the probability variation gaming state). If the winning is a short-open big hit during a specific game, the remaining will be left as a promising re-setting success effect. It is configured to execute an effect of informing that the probability variation count is reset (updated to a value set after the special game). In addition, the probability change re-set success effect that is executed when a short opening big hit is won during a specific game is configured so that different effects are executed depending on the number of remaining probability changing times when winning the short opening big hit. .

(6) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 5 from this embodiment >>

(6-1) Limited frequency In the fifth modification from the present embodiment, in order to secure the time for executing the stage transition effect, in the final variation at each stage (in this example, the first stage and the second stage), It is configured to refer to a dedicated variation mode determination table in which a variation mode (variation time) that can execute the stage transition effect is selected.

(6-2) Stage Transition Effect In the fifth modification from the present embodiment, when the final change in the effect stage is lost, an effect suggesting the transition of the effect stage (stage transition effect) can be executed. Has been. Further, since the stage transition effect is not executed at the time of winning, if the stage transition effect does not occur due to the final change of the effect stage, it becomes definite that the final change is a change related to the big hit.

(7) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 6 from this embodiment >>
(7-1) jackpot symbol In the sixth modification from the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol (5A, 5B, 7A, 7B) that shifts to the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends, and the probability variation gaming state after the special game ends There are jackpot symbols (4A, 4B) that do not shift to.

(7-2) Limited Frequency In the sixth modification from the present embodiment, the timing at which the variation mode determination table to be referred to can be changed depending on the jackpot symbol.

  In the modified example 6 from the present embodiment, there is a pattern related to switching of the variation mode determination table to be referenced, which is selected only in the probability variation game state in the specific game state.

(8) << Characteristic configuration in Modification 7 from this embodiment >>

(8-1) Special Game Completion Demo In the seventh modification from the present embodiment, after the opening time of the big prize opening related to the final round of the special game is over, the special game symbol is changed during the period until the main game symbol can be changed. The game end demo can be displayed. In addition, the execution time of the special game end demonstration is configured to be determined based on the jackpot symbol related to the special game.

  Also, when there is a big hit in the hold (especially in the hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, the special game ends during the period until the timing of the substantial change of the big hit hold. The same (or substantially the same) image as the demo can be displayed on the front layer of the display area.

  In addition, when there is no big hit hold in the hold (especially in the hold on the second main game side) at the end of the special game, the period until all of the hold existing at that time ends variably, The same (or substantially the same) image as the special game end demonstration is configured to be displayed on the front layer of the display area.

(9) << Characteristic configuration in the second embodiment >>

(9-1) Control (9-1-1) Main side control (9-1-1-1) Specific game In the second embodiment, when a game ball enters a specific area during a special game After the special game, a predetermined number A (80 times in this example) of the probability variation game state and a predetermined number of times A (80 times in this example) time-reduced game, the limited frequency table which is a three-stage ST 1 → Limited frequency table 2 → Limited frequency table 3 is referred to. On the other hand, if there is no game ball in a specific area during a special game, after the special game, a non-stochastic game state and a predetermined number of times B (50 times in this example) are reduced in time, The game table 3 is referred to.

In the second embodiment, the number of time-reduced games that are given when a probability variation game state is set after a special game is a predetermined number X (80 in this example), and a non-probability variation game state is set after a special game The number of time-reduced games given to is a predetermined number Y (50 in this example), and XY = 30 coincides with the number of fluctuations in the first stage of the three-stage ST of 30 times. Yes.
(10) ≪Change mode≫

  Note that the configuration of the present embodiment is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. The following are possible modifications from the present embodiment.

(10-1) Board Configuration (10-1-1) Game Area As a configuration of the change mode, the first launch strength (for example, the strength at which game balls mainly flow down on the left side of the board) is compared with the first launch strength. A path (for example, arranged on the right side of the board surface) through which the game ball flows when it is fired at a second firing strength (for example, the strength at which the game ball mainly flows down to the right side of the board surface) is stronger than the firing intensity, A section having a width exceeding one gaming ball and less than two gaming balls, that is, a section where a gaming ball that has entered the section later does not overtake the gaming ball that has previously entered the section. Configure as follows. A distribution winning opening and a normal winning opening are provided downstream of the exit of the section. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid a situation where a player enters a ball that greatly exceeds the upper limit of the number of balls entered in one round of the special game. In addition, an electric accessory is also provided downstream of the outlet of the section. By constituting in this way, excessive entry can be avoided while the electric accessory is open. In addition, the game area may have a specific area in which a special game is started when a game ball enters after the stoppage of the big hit symbol, separately from the big prize opening related to the distributed game. Good.

(10-1-2) Electric combination In this example, the electric combination is provided only at the second main game start opening, but both main game start openings may be provided only at the first main game start opening. Even if it is provided at any of the main game start ports, it may not be provided.

(10-1-3) Main game start port In this example, the first main game start port is arranged in the approximate center of the game area, and the second main game start port is arranged on the right side of the game area. It is not limited. For example, a mode in which a second main game start port is provided above or below (for example, directly below) the first main game start port (in this case, a second main game start port is installed directly below the first main game start port and (2) The main game start opening may be configured not to win the second main game start opening when the electric combination is attached when the electric play is closed). A mode provided on the right side of the position of the two main game start ports, a mode where only two start ports are provided (that is, a conventional first type), a mode where a plurality of one or both start ports are provided (for example, the first main game start port) The first main game start port A and the first main game start port B are provided, and a random number is acquired from a common random number generator regardless of which is won).

(10-1-4) Grand prize opening (10-1-4-1) Position (10-1-4-1-1) vertical direction Up and down so that the two big prize openings overlap with each other on the basis of the vertical direction You may arrange. In addition, either of the big winning openings may be on the top. Further, even if they do not overlap vertically with respect to the vertical direction, one large prize winning opening may be arranged on the upstream side along the flow path, and the other large winning prize opening may be arranged downstream thereof.
(10-1-4-1-2) Left-right direction A second firing strength (for example, the right side of the board has a main firing force) that is stronger than the first firing strength (for example, the strength at which game balls mainly flow to the left side of the board). The big winning opening may be arranged at a position where it is easy to enter with a strength at which the game ball flows down. Moreover, you may provide one big winning opening in the left or the right on the basis of the position of the other big winning opening. For example, an aspect in which one big prize opening is provided on the right side with the center (vertical direction) of the board surface as a reference, and the other big prize opening is provided on the right side thereof. An aspect in which one big prize opening is provided, and the other big prize opening is provided on the right side of the board, one big prize opening is provided on the left side with respect to the center (vertical direction) of the board surface, and the other big prize opening is provided on the right side. Aspect to be provided, with the center (vertical direction) of the board surface as a reference, one large winning opening is provided on the left side, and the other large winning opening is provided on the left side, and the center of the board surface (vertical direction) is substantially centered An embodiment in which one large winning opening is provided on the left side and the other large winning opening is provided on the left side thereof.
(10-1-4-2) Size and shape In this example, the size of the distribution prize winning opening and the normal prize winning opening are substantially the same, but one size or shape may be different from the other size. .
(10-1-4-3) Type In this example, the first grand prize winning opening and the second big winning prize opening are tilting type big winning openings, but either or both of them are other types, for example, a game board (game The player can take a state protruding from the player side (hereinafter referred to as the advance state) and a state retracted into the game board (opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as the retracted state). It may be a winning opening (so-called “velo-type attacker”), single-wing or double-wing type attacker (so-called “wing-type attacker” in a conventional type 2 game machine).

(10-1-5) Others Although not particularly shown in this example, a round number indicator lamp for displaying the number of rounds to be executed in the big hit may be provided.

  The light guide plate display device, which is an optical device mainly composed of a light guide plate and a light emitting element and produces an effect by surface light emission of the light guide plate, is viewed from the front of the effect display device (front side) and the rear surface of the center decoration. You may comprise so that it may provide in (back side). The mounting position of the light guide plate display device is not limited to this, and may be provided on the front side from the position as viewed from the player, for example, on the front surface of the center decoration, the front surface or the rear surface of the transparent plate, and further transparent. It is good also as a light-guide plate display apparatus which provided the display pattern in board itself and made the transparent plate the light-guide plate.

(10-2) Control-related (10-2-1) Main-side control (10-2-1-1) launching device The game ball launching device launches a game ball when an abnormal discharge ball is detected or fraud is detected. It may be configured to cancel. The launching device is preferably not the main side control but the prize ball paying side control, but may be the main side control.

(10-2-1-2) When the power is turned off and when the power is turned on An information saving area is provided to back up game-related information at the time of power interruption. May be. In this case, a process that can acquire and restore the game-related information backed up in the information saving area is executed when power is restored.

(10-2-1-3) Special game

  In this example, although not particularly shown, special games of the same round may be executed at the time of a big hit. In that case, you may comprise so that the player profit for every jackpot may differ by changing the opening mode of a big winning opening.

  In addition, the types of opening of the special winning opening in the special game may be reduced or increased. In addition, in one round, an “opening / closing mode” may be provided that repeats the opening operation for a predetermined time until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the number of winnings reaches a predetermined number or when a predetermined time is reached).

  In this example, the case where the small hit is not provided and the case where the small hit is provided on both the first main game side and the second main game side are illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and only the first main game side is provided. Or provided only on the second main game side.

  The release pattern of the special game may be determined using a reference table, or the special game may be configured to be executed with a predetermined release pattern.

  The opening pattern of the special game may be determined by lottery instead of being determined based on the winning symbol. For example, a mode in which a special area in which a special game is started when a game ball enters after the jackpot symbol is stopped is provided separately from the second big prize opening (or the first big prize opening). With regard to the above, a random number is acquired upon the passage of the specific area, and based on the acquired random number, the content of the special game to be started and / or the game state to be transferred after the special game is finished can be determined. May be.

(10-2-1-4) Specific game If a special area is entered while a special game is being executed, the probability variation gaming state that continues until the next jackpot occurs after the special game ends. You may comprise so that it may transfer. Further, when the number of continuous transitions to the probability variation gaming state reaches a predetermined number, it may be configured to forcibly transition to the non-probability variation gaming state after the end of the special game after reaching the predetermined number of times. In addition, when a falling lottery executed for each change of the main game symbol is won, it may be configured to be able to shift to a non-probability variation game state.

  In this example, during the execution of the special game, if there is no entry to the specific area, it is configured to shift to the non-stochastic variation gaming state / time reduction gaming state, but is not limited to this, During the execution of a special game, if there is no entry to a specific area (in other words, after the special game is over, the game does not enter the probability variation game state), so that it does not enter the time-reduced game state. It may be configured.

(10-2-1-5) Limited frequency

  In this example, the process of subtracting the limited frequency counter value (the process of step 1413) is executed after the process of step 1450 in FIG. It may be configured to execute after the time has expired.

  In this example, in FIG. 10, after the process of step 1430 (when the stop symbol is a big hit symbol), a process of setting a predetermined number of times in the limited frequency counter (the process of step 1431) is executed. The present invention is not limited, and a process of setting a predetermined number of times to the limited frequency counter may be executed after the end of the special game (for example, after step 1656 in FIG. 17).

  In the probability variation gaming state, the variation mode on the second main game side may be different depending on the number of reserved balls on the first main game side. For example, in the first stage of the three-stage ST, the first main game The table that the second main game side refers to when the number of reserved balls on the game side is 0 is the limited frequency table A, and when the number of reserved balls on the first main game side is 1 to 4, the second main game side refers to it. The table may be a limited frequency table B, and the limited frequency table A and the limited frequency table B may be configured such that the average value of the variation time is different (for example, the limited frequency table A has a longer average variation time). May be configured). Note that, as in this example, as shown in FIGS. 13, 37, and 46, if the configuration contents of the table to be referenced are different depending on the number of holds, for example, the table to be referred to when the number of holds is 0 to 1. A reference table group including a table to be referred to when the number of holdings is 2 to 3 is switched according to the number of fluctuations since a predetermined symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol) is stopped. At the start, the table to be referred to when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 or the table to be referred to when the holding number is 2 to 3 is determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of holding numbers, variation mode determination random numbers, special figure types (whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side), etc. in a certain table. The table may be configured so that the variation mode can be determined using the above information as a key.

  In this example, in the probability variation gaming state, the three types of limited frequency tables are sequentially referred to as the three-stage ST. However, the number of the limited frequency tables to be referred to is not limited to this and may be any number. . Further, although the table to be referred to is always constant in each stage, the present invention is not limited to this, and the table to be referenced may be changed even in one stage.

  In the present embodiment, the number of changes of the main game symbol staying at each stage in the three stages ST is fixed (first stage 30 times, second stage 40 times, third stage 10 times), but is not limited to this. It does not have to be fixed. For example, it may be configured so that the number of changes in the main game symbol staying at each stage can be different depending on the type of the main game symbol that triggered the special game, or the player can select (for example, the sub input button It may be configured to be selectable based on an operation or a game ball entering a specific entrance.

  A parallel frequency lottery on the first main game side and the second main game side is configured to be executable, and a limited frequency table (variation mode) referred to by a lottery at the time of winning the special game or after the special game is won. The determination table may be different. For example, if the jackpot symbol is a specific jackpot symbol, only the first variation on the first main game side after the execution of the special game is set to the long variation A (for example, 300 seconds), and if it is not the specific jackpot symbol, the special game is performed. Later, only the first fluctuation on the first main game side is set as the long fluctuation B (for example, 50 seconds), and the average fluctuation time is shorter than the long fluctuation A and the long fluctuation B on the second main game side (for example, 5 Second) table may be referred to. In this case, it is desirable that the special game triggered by the second main game symbol is more advantageous for the player than the first main game symbol.

  The special game according to the second main game symbol is more advantageous for the player than the special game according to the first main game symbol, and the reserved ball according to the second main game symbol is more advantageous than the reserved ball according to the first main game symbol. In the case of a gaming machine configured to digest first with priority, when a special game is won in a non-stochastic game state and a non-time-reduced game state, and a transition is made to a probability-change game state and a time-reduced game state Alternatively, only the first change of the main game symbol may be a long-time change (for example, a change of 15 seconds). By configuring in this way, it becomes easy to store the reserved balls of the second main game symbol that is advantageous to the player during the long-term fluctuation of the main game symbol immediately after the transition to the specific game state. In addition, in such a configuration, the effect during the first one variation is the same effect as the special game end demonstration effect, and the reserved ball of the second main game symbol accumulates without knowing after the special game ends. The player may have an illusion if he is present.

  After the special game is over, the probability variation game state with a limited number of times (so-called ST) and transition to a specific game state A that is a time-reduced game state with a predetermined probability (for example, 70%). It is configured to shift to a specific gaming state B which is a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and the same (substantially the same) is used to determine the variation mode of the main gaming symbol at the start of either the specific gaming state A or the specific gaming state B ) Or a similar limited frequency table, and in the case of the specific gaming state A, the average value of the number of times of variation for determining the variation mode with reference to the limited frequency table is larger than in the case of the specific gaming state B. May be. When configured in this way, the specific game state A and the specific game state B have substantially the same production mode, and it is difficult to determine which specific game state the player is just looking at the production. desirable. By configuring in this way, the player can specify a high profit for the player because the predetermined number of times (the effect based on the variation mode determined with reference to the limited frequency table) is long. It can be detected that there is a high possibility of staying in the gaming state A. Similarly, the greater the number of times of variation referring to the limited frequency table, the higher the degree of expectation that the number of times of variation that results in a time-saving game is large (the number of times of time reduction is large).

  The limited frequency table to be referred to can be changed according to the number of consecutive wins for a special game (number of consecutive games) during the probability varying game state (or / and the time-saving game state) without shifting to the normal game state. (For example, as the number of consecutive resorts increases, a shorter variation time becomes easier to select). In the case of a multi-stage ST (for example, a three-stage ST), the number of stays at each stage may be different depending on the number of consecutive villas (for example, in the case of a three-stage ST, the second-stage villa is one stage. : 30 rotations, 2 steps: 40 rotations, 3 steps: 10 rotations, the 5th stage is 1 step: 60 rotations, 2 steps: 20 rotations, 3 steps: 10 rotations, etc.).

(10-2-2) Sub-main side control

(10-2-2-1) Pre-reading effect In this example, the pre-reading effect is configured to be executed only during a predetermined period (31st to 80th fluctuations) during the specific game. You may comprise so that a prefetch effect can be performed even if it is outside the said predetermined period. In the case of such a configuration, the frequency of occurrence of the pre-reading effect may be different depending on each period (for example, three periods of the 1st to 30th variation, the 31st to 70th variation, and the 71st to 80th variation).

  Moreover, you may have the prefetching effect only for each said period, and may have the common prefetching effect which can be performed in two or more periods.

  In addition, when the prefetch effect is configured to be executable in a predetermined period (the 71st to 80th fluctuations) during the specific game, when the prefetch effect is executed, the result of the change during the predetermined period does not matter. The common effect {for example, the effect of prompting the sub input button to be pressed (see the image diagram in FIG. 24)} may not be executed (for example, the pre-reading effect is executed instead of the common effect).

  Even when the prefetch effect over a plurality of variations straddles the end of the predetermined period, the prefetch effect may be executed. In such a configuration, when a pre-reading effect occurs across the end of the predetermined period, the big hit expectation degree related to the pre-reading effect is higher than the case where the end of the predetermined period is not crossed. It may be configured. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect as if the completed predetermined period has been extended (for example, an effect that can be selected during the completed predetermined period) or an effect that is not selected in the stay stage where the user is currently staying. May be. When configured in this way, when the extension effect is executed, it may be configured so that it is deterministic that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In addition, as an example of an effect at the time of executing the pre-reading effect that makes it deterministic that there is a big hit in the hold, the effect of the effect stage that has already been completed may be executed as the pre-reading effect ( For example, the pre-reading effect of the long effect stage is executed on the fixed effect stage).

  In this example, although not particularly illustrated, the contents of the presentation may be made different depending on the number of suspensions at the time of digestion of the hold (so-called trigger hold) that triggered the execution of the prefetch effect. For example, when the number of holdings is small (0 or 1), even if the trigger holding is lost holding, the roaring effect is executed, while when the number of holdings is large (2 or 3), the trigger holding is performed. If the loss is on hold, the roaring effect may not be executed (or an effect with a relatively low expectation is executed). In the case of such a configuration, it is preferable that the roaring effect executed at the time of digestion of the loss hold is configured to execute the same (substantially similar) effect as the roaring effect that can be executed when the number of holds is large ( For example, the same variation time).

(10-2-2-2) Reservation in Renrenso Although not specifically shown in this example, a special game end demo (displayed from the end of the special game until the next main game symbol can be changed is displayed. You may comprise so that a production | presentation) can be performed. In the case of such a configuration, in particular, when there is a hold that becomes a big hit in the hold at the end of the special game (in the case of preferential digestion of the second main game symbol, in the hold of the second main game symbol) It may be configured as if a big hit is suddenly generated immediately after the end of the special game by continuing the same effect as the special game end demonstration until the big hit is suspended or the fluctuation is stopped. In addition, in such a configuration, even when there is no big hit in the hold, the same game as the special game end demonstration is continued, so that a sense of expectation of becoming a reserved game in the hold You may comprise so that a production can be performed. In addition, when continuing the production substantially the same as the special game end demonstration, it is preferable that the production is displayed for a period of time equal to or longer than at least one change.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, in a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined round, a special game end demonstration) from the start of the special game until the change of the main game symbol becomes possible, it will be a big hit within the hold. When there is a hold, you may comprise so that the effect which alert | reports to that effect (rendition villa advance notice effect) can be performed. In addition, when shifting from the normal gaming state (the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state) to the probability variation gaming state, it may be configured not to execute the on-hold extended resort notice effect. In the case of such a configuration, a special effect (or an effect executed in a predetermined situation) may be executed during the suspension of the big hit. In addition, the dedicated effect may be configured to be executed with a relatively short variation time compared to the average value of the variation times of the other jackpot effects. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called a ball-type gaming machine) that enters a probability-variable gaming state after the special game when a game ball enters the specific area during the special game, the specific It may be configured such that a game ball in the area can be executed by entering the game area in advance in the reserved area (the presence or absence of the in-hold area may differ depending on whether or not a specific area has been entered) For this reason, it is desirable to notify the on-hold range resort when the player enters the ball. For example, it is scheduled to win the winning lottery regardless of whether the game is in the probability variation game state or the non-probability variation game state. In such a case, it is possible to notify the on-hold consecutive resort without being triggered by the entry). As a notification method, for example, a game ball is placed in the specific area by an effect display device SG or an effect device provided in front of the effect display device SG (for example, a so-called movable object for effect or a light guide plate). When it is configured to be able to execute an effect of notifying that the specific area has been entered at the timing of entering the ball, the effect device for executing the on-hold extended resort notice effect and the entry to the specific area The effect device that performs the effect of notifying that the ball has been made may be the same (for example, “V” is displayed on the effect display device SG as an effect of notifying that the ball has been entered into the specific area. When displaying the drawn image, the character color of the “V” is made different to suggest or notify the presence or absence of an on-hold consecutive resort, or different from the image drawn with the “V”. The image suggests whether there is a reserved renzo (For example, the movable body accessory for production is displaced from the initial position to a position where the production can be performed, or the light is applied to the light guide plate to form an image on the light guide plate.) When performing an effect of notifying that a specific area has been entered, such as by floating, an image that suggests or notifies the presence or absence of an on-hold extended villa is displayed on the effect display device SG, etc. ).

  In this example, although not shown in particular, if there is a big hit in a situation where there is a big hit in the hold (when it becomes a renage in the hold), the effect related to the big hit is a probability until the next big hit It may be configured to be able to be executed as a big hit with a high expectation that the floating gaming state will continue (for example, in the ball type game machine shown in the second embodiment, the game to the specific area C22 Even when the ball has not been entered, if the game is to be held within the hold, an effect is performed as if the game ball has entered the specific area C22 and the state has shifted to the probability variation gaming state. May be configured to obtain).

(10-2-2-3) Other effects In this example, it is configured to have an effect dedicated to a predetermined period during a specific game. It may be configured so that it can occur (even if the main game symbol fluctuates).

  In this example, although not particularly illustrated, an effect suggesting that a predetermined period in a specific game is over (the predetermined period is switched) is executed (for example, executed at the last change during the predetermined period). You may comprise so that it can do. In the case of such a configuration, a part or all of the contents of the suggestion effect may be different depending on whether the suggestion effect is executed or not. Moreover, you may comprise so that the said suggestion effect may not be performed with the fluctuation | variation which becomes a big hit.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, the player can select a part or all of the production mode during the specific game at a predetermined timing during the special game or after the special game (for example, the operation of the sub input button SB). May be selected). In the case of such a configuration, when a power interruption occurs after the selection of the player, a predetermined production mode (for example, a production mode set as a default) that does not depend on the player's selection after the interruption is restored. ), A part or all of the effects during the specific game may be executed. In addition, the effect mode is configured so that it can be selected only at the time of the first hit, and in the specific game after the special game, the effect mode selected at the time of the first hit (or the effect mode automatically determined by the order, random number, etc.) You may comprise so that an effect can be performed. Further, the effect that prompts the selection of the effect mode may be displayed only at the time of first hit, and the effect related to the specific game after the special game after that may be configured to be selectable by satisfying a predetermined condition. , Can be selected by a certain number of consecutive villas (big hit), or can be selected (for example, during a big hit symbol stop display), start a big hit (during a big hit start demo display) or during a big hit (during a specific round) , A sub-input button operation) may be configured to be selectable or switchable (a hidden command that does not display an effect prompting the operation but can be selected or switched by performing a predetermined operation) May be).

  In this example, although not specifically shown, the first change after a special game (especially, a special game state → a special game in which a probability change game state and a time reduction game state) is a special effect (for example, a long scale) You may comprise so that a production | presentation) can be performed. Moreover, you may comprise so that an effect substantially the same as a special game completion | finish demo can be performed.

  In this example, although not shown in particular, the number of times of time-reduced games may be limited to a plurality of patterns (for example, three patterns of 30, 50, and 80 fluctuations). Without giving a notification, the effect is performed as if the limited number of time-reduced games has increased in a predetermined period after the start of the time-reduced game (for example, “short time + 5 times!” Is displayed) You may comprise so that the limitation number of actual time reduction games may be alert | reported by the end of a period.

  In this example, although not particularly illustrated, it may be configured so that the player can select a period and an order for referring to a certain effect content determination table during a specific game (for example, the sub input button SB is selected). Press to select the production content table).

  In this example, the number of consecutive resorts in a specific gaming state is counted, and when the number of consecutive resorts reaches a predetermined number, the ending effect display is executed. It may be configured so that various effects can be executed according to the game. For example, as the number of consecutive games increases, the effect mode in the specific game changes (the background changes, the opponent changes, etc.) It may be configured.

  In this example, in the success or failure stage in the fixed time effect, the effect that prompts the button operation and the effect that the background display color changes are executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Various effects such as an effect of whether or not (becomes reach) may be executed.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (1)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (2)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (3)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be in a first variation period state in a specific period after execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, a limited frequency) that can be controlled so as to be in a second variable period state after the number of repetitions of the unit reaches a specific number, counting from the end of execution of the special game. Variation mode determining means MN52),
If a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during the execution of the special game, the first variation period state is set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area is specified during the execution of the special game. The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that when there is no entry into a region (for example, the specific region C22), the first variation period state is not set after the execution of the special game.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (4)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period Value is configured to be the same,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (5)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be a first variation period state in a specific period after the execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variation period state, A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second variation period state after a specific number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number;
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
When a special game has entered a specific area, the first variable period state is entered after the execution of the special game, while no special area has been entered when the special game is executed. In such a case, it is configured not to enter the first variable period state after the execution of the special game.
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (6)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
When a special game has entered a specific area, the first variable period state is entered after the execution of the special game, while no special area has been entered when the special game is executed. In such a case, it is configured not to enter the first variable period state after the execution of the special game.
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (7)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period At least a period state, and is controlled so as to be a first variation period state in a specific period after the execution of the special game, and in the case of the first variation period state, A variable period state control unit (for example, a limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52) that can be controlled to be in the second variation period state after a specific number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number;
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
When a special game has entered a specific area, the first variable period state is entered after the execution of the special game, while no special area has been entered when the special game is executed. In such a case, it is configured not to enter the first variable period state after the execution of the special game.
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period Value is configured to be the same,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (8)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
If the specific number of times is scheduled to be reached by the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first variable period state, the specific number of times is determined based on information about the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition. The pre-reading effect display content is not displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) both before reaching the specified number of times and after reaching the specified number of times, or before reaching the specified number of times and the specified number of times. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to have different selection probabilities as to whether or not to display the hold pre-reading effect display contents on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) in both of the times after the arrival.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (9)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
If the specific number of times is scheduled to be reached by the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first variable period state, the specific number of times is determined based on information about the hold that satisfies the predetermined condition. The pre-reading effect display content is not displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) both before reaching the specified number of times and after reaching the specified number of times, or before reaching the specified number of times and the specified number of times. The pre-reading effect display content is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG) in both of the times after the arrival, or the pre-reading effect display content is displayed on the effect display unit (for example, only before reaching the specific number of times) The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the selection probabilities of display on the effect display device SG) are different.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (10)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
The shortest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination in the first variation period state is non-winning is the identification related to the case where the result of the determination of the success / failure in the second variation period state is not successful The longest value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the determination of success / failure in the first variable period state is winning is shorter than the shortest value of the variable display period of information. It is configured to be longer than the longest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination is winning,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (eg, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (11)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
The shortest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination in the first variation period state is non-winning is the identification related to the case where the result of the determination of the success / failure in the second variation period state is not successful The longest value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the determination of success / failure in the first variable period state is winning is shorter than the shortest value of the variable display period of information. It is configured to be longer than the longest value of the variation display period of the identification information related to the case where the result of the success / failure determination is winning,
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (12)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
When the special game is executed, there are a normal special game and a first low profit special game and a second low profit special game which are more disadvantageous to the player than the normal special game. When one low-profit special game is executed, after the execution of the first low-profit special game, the first variable period state can be set again. If executed, the second variable period state is configured to be maintained after the execution of the second low profit special game,
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (13)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inability to enter or open state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
When a special game is executed in the high probability lottery state and the high frequency release state, after the execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the high frequency release state in which the specified number of times becomes the predetermined number of times, and When the special game is executed in the low probability lottery state and the low frequency release state, the high probability lottery state and the above-mentioned It is configured not to be in the first variable period state while being able to be in a high frequency open state where the specified number of times is less than the predetermined number of times,
In the case of the first variation period state, the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second In the case of the number of holds, the difference in the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first difference value, In the variable period state, if the number of holds at the time when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is the first hold number and the number of holds at the time when the determination result is satisfied is the second hold number Is the second difference in which the difference in the average value of the variation display period of the identification information is smaller than the first difference value in the case where the result of the success / failure determination when the success / failure determination permission condition is satisfied is not won Or the period of the variable information display period It is pachinko machines, wherein the value is configured to be identical.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (14)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inability to enter or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. If there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation period state is not set.
According to the presence / absence of entering a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, the high-frequency release state in which the specified number of times is different after the execution of the special game is completed. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (15)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inability to enter or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. If there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation period state is not set.
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the predetermined number of times is set to a high-frequency open state, If there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the predetermined number of times is less than the first number The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured to be in a high-frequency open state.

Pachinko machines related to this concept (16)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A member attached to the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) that can be displaced between an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) The game ball can enter the start port B10) or can enter the game more easily than in the closed state, and when the ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the start port (for example, the second main game start port B10). A variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter compared to the inability to enter or open state,
A variable winning opening (for example, a first grand prize opening C10, a second big prize opening C20) capable of taking a closed state and an open state;
A specific area (for example, a specific area C22) in which a game ball that has entered a variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10, the second large winning opening C20) can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
A validity determination means (for example, a validity determination lottery means MN10) for performing a validity determination based on the random number;
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), a variable prize is awarded. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game that can make the mouth (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player;
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
As the gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric component B11d), the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric combination) is more effective than the low frequency open state and the low frequency open state. The object B11d) has a high-frequency open state that tends to be in an open state, and is controlled so that it can be set to a high-frequency open state after completion of the execution of the special game. An open state control means (for example, second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B) that can be controlled so as not to be infrequently opened until the number of repetitions of one unit reaches a specified number. )
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of the special game, the high probability lottery state and the first variation period state are set after the execution of the special game, while the specific area at the time of execution of the special game. If there is no entry to the game, the low probability lottery state is set after the execution of the special game and the first variation period state is not set.
When a special area (for example, the specific area C22) is entered during the execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the predetermined number of times is set to a high frequency open state, If there is no entry into a specific area (for example, the specific area C22) at the time of execution of the special game, after the execution of the special game, the specified number of times is a second number less than the first number of times. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the high frequency release state is set, and the difference between the first number and the second number is the specific number.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entry determination means, MJ11-A first main game start entrance entrance judgment means MJ11-B second main game start entrance entrance judgment means, MJ11-H auxiliary game entry Ball entrance entry determination means MJ11-C10 1st grand prize entrance entrance determination means, MJ11-C20 2nd entrance prize entrance determination means MJ11-C22 Specific area entrance determination means, MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A First main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-B Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H Auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ30 Retention control means MJ31 Retention control means, MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means MJ32 symbol hold means, MJ32-A first main game symbol hold means MJ32b-A first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-B 2 main game symbol hold means MJ32b-B 2nd main game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MJ32-H auxiliary game symbol hold means MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means, MN game content determination means MN10 winning lottery means, MN11-A first main game win / fail lottery means MN11ta-A first main game pass / fail lottery table, MN11-B second main game pass / fail lottery means MN11ta-B second main game pass / fail lottery table, MN11-H auxiliary game pass / fail Lottery means MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table, MN20 Special game transition determination means MN40 Symbol content determination means, MN41-A First main game symbol determination means MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table, MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table, MN 1-H auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41ta-H auxiliary game symbol determining lottery table, MN50 variation mode determining unit MN51-A first main game variation mode determining unit, MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determining lottery table MN51 -B 2nd main game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-B 2nd main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination means, MN51ta-H Auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN52 Limited frequency variation mode MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52c limited frequency counter, MN52b limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C 1st and 2nd main game symbol variation management timer MP11 -H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP20-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP21-B Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determination means MP22t-B second main game start opening electric game object release timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determination means, MP32 special game content determination means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game execution means MP33-C first and second Two major winning opening electrical accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 special game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP50 specific game control means, MP51 probability change end condition determination means MP51c probability change count counter, MP52 time reduction end condition determination means MP52c Time reduction counter, MB gaming state temporary storage means M 10-C first and second main game state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary game state temporary storage means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means B20b Special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b Specific game related information temporary storage means MT Information transmission control means, MT10 command transmission buffer MH Prize ball payout determination means A 1st main game peripheral device, A10 1st main game start port A11s First main game start entrance detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol hold display unit B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game Start port B11s Second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game Technical symbol display part B21h Second main game symbol hold display part C First and second main game shared peripherals, C10 First big prize opening C11s First big prize opening prize detection device, C11d First big prize opening electric appliance C20 2nd grand prize opening, C21s 2nd big prize opening prize detection device C21d
H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H21h auxiliary game symbol hold display unit S sub control board, SM effect display control Means (Sub-main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means , SM21t, drawing variation time management timer SM22, drawing hold information display control means, SM22b, drawing hold information temporary storage means SM26, hold prefetch effect execution control means, SM26k hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26c, prefetch effect execution counter, SM23c stay stage Management counter SM23c2 consecutive resort counter, SM23 background effect display control means SM23n background effect display content determination means, SM23b background effect related information temporary storage means SM24, notice effect display control means, SM24n notice effect display Content determining means SM24b Preliminary effect related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determining means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM25ta Effect content determination table, SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Effect display means ( Sub-sub control unit), SS10 sub-information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display-related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display area, SG12 first hold display section SG13 second hold display SB Sub input button, SBs Sub input button input detection device KH Prize ball payout control board KE Prize ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be closed and open;
A specific area in which game balls that have entered the variable prize opening can enter,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information,
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquisition unit, a random number temporary storage unit that temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied;
If satisfied the propriety determination permission condition, and spruce judging means for performing those determination based on the random number,
Identification information display content determination means for determining stop identification information of the identification information based on the result of the determination of correctness by the correctness determination means;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means, the identification information display control means for controlling to stop and display the stop identification information of the identification information after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section,
If the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is winning and the stop identification information of the identification information stopped and displayed on the identification information display section is the specific stop identification information belonging to the specific group, the variable winning opening is advantageous for the player. Special game control means for executing a special game that can be set to a state,
A game state transition control means that has a normal game state and a specific game state that makes it easier to enter the starting port than the normal game state, and that can be controlled to be in the specific game state after completion of execution of the special game;
As a table to be referenced when determining the variation display time of the identification information, there is at least a first variation pattern table, and the first variation pattern table has at least a second variation pattern table having a different selection tendency of the variation display time of the identification information. and, after the completion of the execution of the special game, the first shift-shaped on purpose second variation shaped on purpose varies state control that may be controlled to be either a reference to a second variation pattern table refers to the first shift pattern table Means and
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group in the specific group,
There are multiple types of specific stop identification information as specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group in the specific group,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
Even if any of the multiple types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed, the execution contents of the special game are the same,
When one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and when one of a plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the second specific group is stopped and displayed In, it is configured so that the execution contents of the special game are different from each other,
When a special game is executed when a certain type of specific stop identification information of the plurality of types of specific stop identification information belonging to the first specific group is stopped and displayed, and there is a ball entering a specific area while a specific game state to and first shift state after completion of execution of the special game,
If there is no entry into the specific area when the special game is executed when the certain type of specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the special game state is set after the execution of the special game and the second game is completed. It is configured to change state,
When a specific game state is entered after the execution of a special game, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display,
As a table that is referred to when determining the variation display time of the identification information, the first variation pattern table and the second variation pattern table further include a third variation pattern table in which the selection trend of the variation display time of the identification information is different,
If there is a ball entering a specific area at the time of execution of a special game when the certain type of specific stop identification information is stopped and displayed, the one unit is counted from the end of execution of the special game. After being performed a predetermined number of times, it is configured to be in the third variation state with reference to the third variation pattern table,
In the case where the number of holds at the time when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied is the second number of holds greater than the first number of holds, the result is a first variation state and the result of the success / failure determination by the success / failure determination means is non-winning The variation display time of the identification information that is most likely to be taken in the case of the third variation state and the result of the determination of success / failure by the success / failure determination means is less than the variation display time of the identification information that is most likely to be acquired. Is configured for a long time,
More than the number of candidates related to the variable display time of the identification information that can be selected when the result of the determination of success / failure by the determination unit is non-winning, and is in the third variation state and by the determination unit A pachinko gaming machine, characterized in that the number of candidates related to the variable display time of identification information that can be selected when the result of the determination of success or failure is not won is smaller .

Images